Notations Used in This Guide
- Using the Manual to Search for Information
- Getting the Latest Version of the Documents
Introduction to Your Projector
- Projector Features
- Projector Parts and Functions
Setting Up the Projector
Using Basic Projector Features
Using the Interactive Features
Adjusting Projector Features
Using the Projector on a Network
Monitoring and Controlling the Projector
Adjusting the Menu Settings
Maintaining the Projector
Solving Problems
Appendix

Epson EB-1480Fi User Manual

Displayed below is the user manual for EB-1480Fi by Epson which is a product in the Data Projectors category. This manual has pages.

Related Manuals

Epson Epson M-190: 57.5mm, 5V, Standard Ribbon Manual

Epson Epson SureColor SCF7000 Manual

Epson TM-U220A Manual

Epson TM-U295 Manual

Epson TM-U220PA Manual

Epson TM-U220PA-103 Manual

Epson TM-U295P Parallel White Manual

Epson TM-C100 Manual

User's Guide

Contents 2

Notations Used in This Guide 8

Using the Manual to Search for Information .................................. 9

Searching by Keyword................................................................................................................... 9

Jumping Directly from Bookmarks............................................................................................ 9

Printing Only the Pages You Need............................................................................................ 9

Getting the Latest Version of the Documents............................... 10

Introduction to Your Projector 11

Projector Features............................................................................ 12

Long-life Laser Light Source...................................................................................................... 12

Unique Interactive Functions.................................................................................................... 12

Quick and Easy Setup .................................................................................................................. 13

Flexible Connectivity.................................................................................................................... 13

Connect with Computers ..................................................................................................... 13

Connect with Mobile Devices............................................................................................. 14

Easy Operation from the Control Pad ................................................................................... 14

Large-scale Presentation from the Whiteboard ................................................................ 15

Projector Parts and Functions ........................................................ 16

Projector Parts - Front/Side ....................................................................................................... 16

Projector Parts - Top/Side .......................................................................................................... 17

Projector Parts - Interface........................................................................................................... 18

Projector Parts - Base ................................................................................................................... 19

Projector Parts - Control Panel................................................................................................. 20

Projector Parts - Remote Control ............................................................................................ 21

Projector Parts - Interactive Pens ............................................................................................ 22

Projector Parts - Pen Stand........................................................................................................ 23

Projector Parts - Control Pad..................................................................................................... 24

Projector Parts - Touch Unit ...................................................................................................... 25

Safety Instructions for Magnet................................................................................................. 26

Setting Up the Projector 27

Projector Placement ........................................................................ 28

Projector Setup and Installation Options............................................................................. 28

Settings when Using the Interactive Features ................................................................... 29

Settings when Using the Touch Unit............................................................................... 30

Projector Connections ..................................................................... 31

Connecting to a Computer........................................................................................................ 31

Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video and Audio.............................................. 31

Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio............................................... 32

Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio ........................................... 33

Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad................................................................. 33

Connecting to a Mini PC Installed on a Wall Plate...................................................... 34

Connecting a Computer for Use with PC Interactive Features.............................. 35

Connecting to Video Sources ................................................................................................... 35

Connecting to an HDMI Video Source ............................................................................ 35

Connecting to a Composite Video Source..................................................................... 36

Connecting a Video Source to the Control Pad........................................................... 36

Connecting to External USB Devices ..................................................................................... 37

USB Device Projection ........................................................................................................... 37

Connecting to a USB Device ............................................................................................... 38

Connecting a USB Flash Drive to the Control Pad...................................................... 38

Disconnecting a USB Device ............................................................................................... 39

Connecting to a Document Camera ...................................................................................... 39

Connecting a Printer .................................................................................................................... 39

Connecting to External Output Devices............................................................................... 39

Connecting to an External HDMI Monitor ..................................................................... 39

Connecting to a VGA Monitor ............................................................................................ 40

Connecting to External Speakers ...................................................................................... 41

Connecting a Microphone ................................................................................................... 41

Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model ....................................................... 42

Menu Settings for Multiple Projector Connections.................................................... 43

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control.................................... 45

Contents 3

Installing Batteries in the Pens....................................................... 46

Remote Control Operation.............................................................. 47

Using Basic Projector Features 48

Turning On the Projector ................................................................ 49

Home Screen................................................................................................................................... 50

Turning Off the Projector ................................................................ 51

Setting the Date and Time .............................................................. 52

Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus ......................... 54

Projection Modes ............................................................................. 55

Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control.......................................... 55

Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus ............................................................ 55

Setting the Screen Type .................................................................. 57

Adjusting the Image Position Using Screen Position...................................................... 57

Focusing the Image.......................................................................... 59

Image Shape..................................................................................... 61

Correcting the Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons .............................................. 61

Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner ............................................................... 62

Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction..................................................................... 64

Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction................................................................. 66

Loading Image Shape Setting from Memory ..................................................................... 68

Correcting Image Shape with Corner Markers................................................................... 68

Resizing the Image with the Buttons ............................................. 70

Adjusting the Image Position ......................................................... 71

Selecting an Image Source.............................................................. 72

Image Aspect Ratio .......................................................................... 74

Changing the Image Aspect Ratio.......................................................................................... 74

Available Image Aspect Ratios ................................................................................................. 74

Projected Image Appearance with Each Aspect Mode .................................................. 75

Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode).......................................... 78

Changing the Color Mode ......................................................................................................... 78

Available Color Modes................................................................................................................. 78

Turning On Automatic Luminance Adjustment................................................................ 78

Adjusting the Image Color .............................................................. 80

Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness.................................................................. 80

Adjusting the Gamma ................................................................................................................. 81

Adjusting the Brightness................................................................. 83

Constant Brightness Usage Hours .......................................................................................... 84

Light Source Life Span................................................................................................................. 85

Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons ....................... 86

Inverting the Audio Channels......................................................... 87

Using the Interactive Features 88

Interactive Feature Modes .............................................................. 89

Preparing Before Using Interactive Features................................ 91

Safety Instructions for Interactive Features......................................................................... 91

Using the Interactive Pens ......................................................................................................... 91

Using Interactive Touch Operations with Your Finger ................................................... 93

Safety Instructions for Interactive Touch Operations................................................ 94

Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode) ...................................... 96

Safety Instructions for Whiteboard Mode............................................................................ 96

Starting Whiteboard Mode........................................................................................................ 96

Whiteboard Mode Toolbar................................................................................................... 97

Importing Images in Whiteboard Mode......................................................................... 99

Compatible File Types for Opening in Whiteboard Mode.................................... 101

Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode............. 102

Starting Annotation Mode ...................................................................................................... 102

Annotation Mode Toolbar ................................................................................................. 103

Sharing Drawings........................................................................... 106

Contents 4

Sending Drawing Contents via Email.................................................................................. 106

Creating an Address Book ................................................................................................. 107

Available Directory Service................................................................................................ 108

Saving Drawing Contents........................................................................................................ 108

Available File Format in Whiteboard Mode................................................................ 110

Printing Drawing Contents ..................................................................................................... 110

Available Printer Control Commands in Whiteboard Mode................................. 111

Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen

(Computer Interactive Mode) ....................................................... 112

Computer Interactive Mode System Requirements ...................................................... 112

Using Computer Interactive Mode....................................................................................... 113

Adjusting the Pen Operation Area....................................................................................... 113

Installing Easy Interactive Driver on Mac........................................................................... 115

Controlling a Document Camera.................................................. 116

Selecting Network Device Display ............................................... 117

Using the Interactive Features over a Network.......................... 119

Precautions when Connecting to a Projector on a Different Subnet..................... 119

Using Split Screen Projection ....................................................... 120

Adjusting Projector Features 121

Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously ............................... 122

Unsupported Input Source Combinations for Split Screen Projection .................. 124

Split Screen Projection Restrictions ..................................................................................... 124

Projecting a PC Free Presentation ............................................... 125

Supported PC Free File Types ................................................................................................ 125

Precautions on PC Free Projection....................................................................................... 125

Starting a PC Free Slide Show................................................................................................ 126

Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation............................................................................... 127

PC Free Display Options........................................................................................................... 128

Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily ........................ 130

Stopping Video Action Temporarily ............................................ 131

Zooming Images............................................................................. 132

Saving a User's Logo Image .......................................................... 133

Saving a User Pattern .................................................................... 135

Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings ............. 137

Using Multiple Projectors ............................................................. 138

Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control................................. 138

Setting the Projector ID...................................................................................................... 138

Selecting the Projector You want to Operate............................................................ 139

Adjusting Color Uniformity ..................................................................................................... 140

Blending the Image Edges ...................................................................................................... 142

Matching the Image Colors..................................................................................................... 144

Adjusting the Black Level......................................................................................................... 145

Modifying the Black Level Adjustment Area .............................................................. 147

Adjusting RGBCMY..................................................................................................................... 148

Scaling an Image......................................................................................................................... 149

Projector Security Features .......................................................... 152

Password Security Types.......................................................................................................... 152

Setting a Password ............................................................................................................... 152

Selecting Password Security Types ................................................................................ 153

Entering a Password to Use the Projector................................................................... 154

Locking the Projector's Buttons ............................................................................................ 154

Unlocking the Projector's Buttons.................................................................................. 155

Installing a Security Cable ....................................................................................................... 155

Using the Projector on a Network 157

Wired Network Projection............................................................. 158

Connecting to a Wired Network ........................................................................................... 158

Selecting Wired Network Settings........................................................................................ 158

Wireless Network Projection ........................................................ 162

Safety Instructions for Built-in Wireless LAN Module.................................................... 162

Contents 5

Connection Methods for Wireless Network Projection................................................ 162

Installing the Wireless LAN Module..................................................................................... 163

Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually ............................................................... 164

Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows.......................................................... 167

Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Mac .................................................................... 167

Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Simple AP Mode....................................... 167

Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Infrastructure Mode................................ 168

Supported Client and CA Certificates............................................................................ 170

Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device ................................................................ 170

Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer...................................................... 171

Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen

Mirroring)........................................................................................ 172

Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings .................................................................................... 172

Connecting Using Screen Mirroring with the Miracast Function............................. 174

Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 10..................................................... 175

Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 8.1 .................................................... 175

Secure HTTP.................................................................................... 177

Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Menus .................................................. 177

Supported Web Server Certificates................................................................................ 178

Screen Sharing ............................................................................... 179

Preparing For Screen Sharing ................................................................................................ 179

Sharing the Screen ..................................................................................................................... 180

Receiving Shared Screen Images.......................................................................................... 181

Monitoring and Controlling the Projector 182

Epson Projector Management ...................................................... 183

Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser ........ 184

Web Control Options................................................................................................................. 185

Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser................. 189

Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts ............................... 190

Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages ......................................................................... 190

Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP............................................. 191

Using ESC/VP21 Commands ........................................................ 192

ESC/VP21 Command List ......................................................................................................... 192

Cable Layouts ............................................................................................................................... 192

PJLink Support ............................................................................... 193

Crestron Connected Support........................................................ 194

Setting Up Crestron Connected Support........................................................................... 194

Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron Connected ............................... 194

Crestron Connected Operation Window ..................................................................... 196

Crestron Connected Tools Window ............................................................................... 197

Setting Projector Event Schedules............................................... 199

Adjusting the Menu Settings 202

Using the Projector's Menus ......................................................... 203

Using the Displayed Keyboard..................................................... 204

Available Text Using the Displayed Keyboard................................................................. 204

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu ......................................... 205

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu....................................... 207

Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu .................... 209

Projector Display Settings - Display Menu.................................. 211

Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu............................. 213

Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu .......... 215

Event ID Code List....................................................................................................................... 217

Projector Network Settings - Network Menu.............................. 219

Network Menu - Network Settings Menu.......................................................................... 220

Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu............................................................................. 221

Network Menu - Wired LAN Menu ................................................................................. 223

Network Menu - Mail Notification Menu ..................................................................... 224

Network Menu - Projector Control Menu .................................................................... 224

Contents 6

Network Menu - Network Projection Settings........................................................... 225

Projector Pen And Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu .... 227

Projector Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu ...................... 229

Interactive Menu - Print Menu............................................................................................... 229

Interactive Menu - Save Menu............................................................................................... 230

Interactive Menu - Mail Menu................................................................................................ 231

Interactive Menu - Directory Menu...................................................................................... 231

Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection

Menu ............................................................................................... 233

Image Quality Memory Settings - Memory Menu....................... 235

Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu .......................................... 236

Projector Initial Settings and Reset Options - Initial/All

Settings Menu ................................................................................ 237

Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup) ...... 238

Transferring Settings From a USB Flash Drive ................................................................. 238

Transferring Settings From a Computer ............................................................................ 239

Batch Setup Error Notification ......................................................................................... 240

Maintaining the Projector 241

Projector Maintenance .................................................................. 242

Cleaning the Lens........................................................................... 243

Cleaning the Projector Case.......................................................... 244

Air Filter and Vent Maintenance .................................................. 245

Cleaning the Air Filter ............................................................................................................... 245

Replacing the Air Filter ............................................................................................................. 247

Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip ................................................ 249

Replacing the Soft Pen Tip...................................................................................................... 249

Replacing the Soft Pen Tip with the Hard Pen Tip......................................................... 250

Solving Problems 251

Projection Problems ...................................................................... 252

Projector Indicator Status ............................................................. 253

Solving Image or Sound Problems............................................... 255

Solutions When No Image Appears..................................................................................... 255

Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB Display Function ..................... 255

Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears............................................................... 256

Displaying From a Laptop.................................................................................................. 256

Displaying From a Mac Laptop........................................................................................ 256

Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears .................................................... 257

Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears................................................................ 257

Solutions When the Image is not Rectangular................................................................ 257

Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static..................................................... 258

Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry .................................................................. 258

Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect ................................. 259

Solutions When an Afterimage Remains on the Projected Image .......................... 259

Solutions to Sound Problems................................................................................................. 259

Solutions to Microphone Problems ..................................................................................... 260

Solutions When Image File Names are not Displayed Correctly in PC Free......... 260

Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems....... 261

Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems...................................................... 261

Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control............................................................ 261

Solutions to Password Problems........................................................................................... 262

Solution When "The Battery that Saves Your Clock Settings is Running Low"

Message Appears........................................................................................................................ 262

Solving Interactive Features Problems........................................ 263

Solutions When "Error Occurred in the Easy Interactive Function" Message

Appears........................................................................................................................................... 263

Solutions When the Interactive Pens do not Work........................................................ 263

Solutions When You Cannot Operate a Computer from the Projected Screen . 264

Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position is not Accurate ................................... 264

Solutions When the Interactive Pens are Slow or Difficult to Use ........................... 264

Contents 7

Solutions When the Interactive Touch Operation does not Work........................... 264

Solutions for Problems with Capturing, Printing, Saving, or Scanning.................. 265

Solutions When the Time is Incorrect in Whiteboard Settings ................................. 265

Solutions When Whiteboard Mode does not Start........................................................ 266

Solving Network Problems ........................................................... 267

Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails ................................................................ 267

Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web ................... 267

Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are not Received............................................ 267

Solutions When the Image Contains Static During Network Projection............... 268

Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen Mirroring................................. 268

Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static During Screen Mirroring

Connection.................................................................................................................................... 268

Solutions When the Projected Screen is not Shared Correctly ................................. 269

Solving HDMI Link Problems ........................................................ 270

Solutions When HDMI Link does not Function ............................................................... 270

Appendix 271

Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts............................. 272

Screens............................................................................................................................................ 272

Cables .............................................................................................................................................. 272

Mounts............................................................................................................................................ 272

For Interactive Feature.............................................................................................................. 272

External Devices .......................................................................................................................... 272

Replacement Parts...................................................................................................................... 273

For Wireless Connection .......................................................................................................... 273

Compatible Accessories from Other Projectors .............................................................. 273

Screen Size and Projection Distance............................................ 274

Supported Monitor Display Resolutions ..................................... 276

Projector Specifications ................................................................ 282

Connector Specifications ......................................................................................................... 283

External Dimensions...................................................................... 284

USB Display System Requirements .............................................. 286

Easy Interactive Driver System Requirements............................ 287

List of Safety Symbols and Instructions ...................................... 288

Laser Safety Information............................................................... 290

Laser Warning Labels................................................................................................................. 290

Glossary .......................................................................................... 292

Notices ............................................................................................ 294

FCC Compliance Statement.................................................................................................... 294

Indication of the manufacturer and the importer in accordance with

requirements of EU directive.................................................................................................. 295

Restriction of Use........................................................................................................................ 296

Operating System References................................................................................................ 296

Trademarks.................................................................................................................................... 296

Copyright Notice......................................................................................................................... 297

Copyright Attribution................................................................................................................ 297

Notations Used in This Guide

Safety Symbols

The projector and its manuals use graphical symbols and labels to indicate content that tells you how to use the projector safely.

Read and carefully follow the instructions that are marked with these symbols and labels to avoid injury to persons or damage to property.

Warning

This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or even death.

Caution

This symbol indicates information that, if ignored, could possibly result in personal injury or physical damage due to incorrect handling.

General Information Notations

Attention

This label indicates procedures that may result in damage or injury if sufficient care is not taken.

This label indicates additional information that may be useful to know.

[Button name] Indicates the name of the buttons on the remote control or the control panel.

Example: [Esc] button

Menu/Setting name Indicates projector menu and setting names.

Example:

Select the Image menu

sImage >Advanced

This label indicates links to the related pages.

sThis label indicates the projector's current menu level.

gg Related Links

• "Using the Manual to Search for Information" p.9

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Using the Manual to Search for Information 9

The PDF manual allows you to search for information you are looking for by

keyword, or jump directly to specific sections using the bookmarks. You can

also print only the pages you need. This section explains how to use a PDF

manual that has been opened in Adobe Reader X on your computer.

gg Related Links

• "Searching by Keyword" p.9

• "Jumping Directly from Bookmarks" p.9

• "Printing Only the Pages You Need" p.9

Searching by Keyword

Click Edit >Advanced Search. Enter the keyword (text) for information you

want to find in the search window, and then click Search. Hits are displayed

as a list. Click one of the displayed hits to jump to that page.

Jumping Directly from Bookmarks

Click a title to jump to that page. Click +or >to view the lower level titles in

that section. To return to the previous page, perform the following operation

on your keyboard.

• Windows: Hold down Alt, and then press ←.

• Mac OS: Hold down the command key, and then press ←.

Printing Only the Pages You Need

You can extract and print only the pages you need. Click Print in the File

menu, and then specify the pages you want to print in Pages in Pages to

Print.

• To specify a series of pages, enter a hyphen between the start page and the

end page.

Example: 20-25

• To specify pages that are not in series, divide the pages with commas.

Example: 5, 10, 15

Getting the Latest Version of the Documents 10

You can get the latest version of the manuals and specifications on the Epson

Web site.

Visit epson.sn, and enter your projector's name.

Introduction to Your Projector

Refer to these sections to learn more about your projector's features and part names.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Features" p.12

• "Projector Parts and Functions" p.16

Projector Features 12

This projector comes with these special features. Refer to these sections for

more details.

gg Related Links

• "Long-life Laser Light Source" p.12

• "Unique Interactive Functions" p.12

• "Quick and Easy Setup" p.13

• "Flexible Connectivity" p.13

• "Easy Operation from the Control Pad" p.14

• "Large-scale Presentation from the Whiteboard" p.15

Long-life Laser Light Source

A solid-state laser light source provides virtually maintenance-free operation

until light source brightness is reduced.

Unique Interactive Functions

Easy annotation on the projected screen using the interactive pen or your

finger.

• Annotation with or without a computer.

• Annotation with two pens at the same time.

• Projector operations from the projected screen.

• Scan and display content from a connected scanner.

• Email, save, or print your content without a computer.

• Import content from a USB drive.

• Computer operations from the projected screen.

• Touch-based interactivity using your finger.

gg Related Links

• "Using the Interactive Features" p.88

Projector Features 13

Quick and Easy Setup

• Direct Power On feature to turn on the projector as soon as you plug it in.

• Auto Power On feature to turn on the projector when the projector detects

an image signal from the port you specified as the Auto Power On source.

• Home screen feature to easily select an input source and useful functions.

gg Related Links

• "Home Screen" p.50

• "Turning On the Projector" p.49

Flexible Connectivity

This projector supports a wide variety of easy-to-use connectivity options as

shown below.

gg Related Links

• "Connect with Computers" p.13

• "Connect with Mobile Devices" p.14

Connect with Computers

• Connect with one USB cable to project images and output audio (USB

Display).

• Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) to project up to four images at the same

time by splitting the projected screen. You can project images from

computers on the network, or from smartphones or tablet devices on which

Epson iProjection is installed.

See the Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for details.

Projector Features 14

a• You can download the necessary software and manuals from the

following Web site:

epson.sn/

gg Related Links

• "Wired Network Projection" p.158

• "Wireless Network Projection" p.162

• "Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio" p.32

Connect with Mobile Devices

• Screen Mirroring to connect your projector and mobile device wirelessly

using Miracast technology.

• Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) to connect your projector and mobile

device wirelessly using the app available on the App Store or Google Play.

aAny fees incurred when communicating with the App Store or

Google Play are the responsibility of the customer.

• Epson iProjection (Chromebook) to connect your projector and

Chromebook device wirelessly using the app available on the Chrome Web

Store.

aAny fees incurred when communicating with the Chrome Web Store

are the responsibility of the customer.

gg Related Links

• "Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)"

p.172

Easy Operation from the Control Pad

You can easily perform frequently used operations such as turning the power

on/off and changing the source using the control pad (EB-1485Fi only).

By connecting the control pad and the projector using the HDBaseT port, you

can operate the projector and input signals to it from a distant location, such

as a large hall or event site.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Parts - Control Pad" p.24

• "Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad" p.33

• "Connecting a Video Source to the Control Pad" p.36

• "Connecting a USB Flash Drive to the Control Pad" p.38

Projector Features 15

Large-scale Presentation from the Whiteboard

By connecting your projector to other projectors using the HDMI Out port,

you can easily project your whiteboard image live onto a large screen.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Parts - Interface" p.18

• "Connecting to an External HDMI Monitor" p.39

Projector Parts and Functions 16

The following sections explain the projector parts and their functions.

All of the features in this guide are explained using illustrations of EB-1485Fi

unless otherwise mentioned.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Parts - Front/Side" p.16

• "Projector Parts - Top/Side" p.17

• "Projector Parts - Interface" p.18

• "Projector Parts - Base" p.19

• "Projector Parts - Control Panel" p.20

• "Projector Parts - Remote Control" p.21

• "Projector Parts - Interactive Pens" p.22

• "Projector Parts - Pen Stand" p.23

• "Projector Parts - Control Pad" p.24

• "Projector Parts - Touch Unit" p.25

• "Safety Instructions for Magnet" p.26

Projector Parts - Front/Side

Name Function

APower button [ ] Turns the projector on or off.

BIndicator lights Indicates the projector's status.

CRemote receiver Receives signals from the remote control.

Projector Parts and Functions 17

Name Function

DAir exhaust vent Exhaust vent for air used to cool the projector

internally.

Caution

While projecting, do not put your face or

hands near the air exhaust vent, and do not

place objects that may become warped or

damaged by heat near the vent. Hot air from

the air exhaust vent could cause burns,

warping, or accidents to occur.

EFront cover Open to access the focus lever and control panel.

FControl panel Operates the projector.

GFocus lever Adjusts the image focus.

HSpeakers Outputs audio.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Indicator Status" p.253

• "Projector Parts - Control Panel" p.20

• "Focusing the Image" p.59

Projector Parts - Top/Side

Name Function

AInteractive pen

receiver

Receives signals from the interactive pen.

BProjection lens Images are projected from here.

Warning

• Do not look into the projection lens while

projecting.

• Do not place any objects or put your hand

near the projection lens. It could cause

burns, fire, or the object to warp because this

area reaches a high temperature due to the

concentrated projection light.

Projector Parts and Functions 18

Name Function

CRemote receiver Receives signals from the remote control.

DCable cover screws Screws to fix the cable cover in place.

ECable cover Loosen the two screws and open the cover when

connecting cables for external devices or installing the

wireless LAN module.

FAir filter cover Open to access the air filter.

GAir intake vent (air

filter)

Takes in air to cool the projector internally.

HPower inlet Connects the power cord to the projector.

ISecurity slot The security slot is compatible with the Microsaver

Security System manufactured by Kensington.

gg Related Links

• "Air Filter and Vent Maintenance" p.245

• "Using the Interactive Pens" p.91

• "Installing a Security Cable" p.155

Projector Parts - Interface

Name Function

AHDMI Out port Outputs video signals to an external monitor.

Connecting an HDMI cable from this port to the

HDMI port of another projector lets you project a

unified image area from both projectors (EB-1485Fi

only).

This port is compatible with HDCP2.3.

BHDBaseT port (EB-

1485Fi only)

If you are using the control pad, open the port cover to

connect a LAN cable between the projector and the

control pad.

CMic port Inputs audio from the microphone.

DHDMI1/HDMI2/HD

MI3 port

Inputs video signals from HDMI compatible video

equipment and computers.

This port is compatible with HDCP2.3.

EComputer1/Compute

r2 port

Inputs image signals from a computer.

FLAN port Use to connect a LAN cable to connect to a network.

GUSB-B1/USB-B2 port USB-B1: Use to connect a USB cable to a computer to

use the interactive pen as a mouse.

Use to connect a USB cable to the computer to project

computer images. (Turn on the USB Display setting in

the projector's Signal I/O menu first.)

USB-B2: Use to connect a USB cable to enable use of

interactive features with a mini-PC. Select the USB-B2

settings in the projector's Pen/Touch menu to select

this input port.

sPen/Touch >PC Interactivity >USB-B2

HUSB-A1/USB-A2 port Use to connect a USB memory device or digital camera

for projecting movies or images using the PC Free

feature.

Use to connect the optional document camera.

Use to connect a USB cable to the control pad when

connecting a USB storage device, printer, or USB

keyboard to the control pad.

Install the wireless LAN module.

Projector Parts and Functions 19

Name Function

ISYNC IN/OUT ports When using the interactive features in the same room

as multiple versions of the same projector, you need to

connect the optional remote control cable set to the

projectors. When the cable set is connected, the

interactive pen operates stably.

JTCH port Use to connect the supplied Touch Unit connection

cable to the Touch Unit.

KVideo port Inputs composite video signals from video sources.

LAudio 1/Audio

2/Audio port

Audio 1: Inputs audio from equipment connected to

the Computer1 port.

Audio 2: Inputs audio from equipment connected to

the Computer2 port. When you project image from the

optional document camera, the audio is input from this

port.

Audio: Inputs audio from equipment connected to the

Video port.

MAudio Out port Outputs audio from the current input source to an

external speaker.

NRS-232C port Use to connect an RS-232C cable to control the

projector from a computer. (This port is for control use

and should not normally be used.)

ODC Out port Provides a connection for a streaming media player to

power it.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Connections" p.31

Projector Parts - Base

Name Function

ASecurity cable

attachment point

Pass the theft-prevention wire lock through here and

lock it in place.

You can also attach the safety wire here to prevent the

projector from falling from the ceiling or wall.

BWall mount fixing

points (four points)

Attach the supplied or optional setting plate when

mounting on a wall.

CVESA mount fixing

points (four points)

When mounting the projector from the ceiling or

vertically on a desk using a commercially available

mount compatible with the VESA Mounting Interface

Standard (100 × 100 mm), use these point to attach the

mount.

Projector Parts and Functions 20

Name Function

DAir intake vent Takes in air to cool the projector internally.

Warning

To avoid blocking the air intake vent beneath

the projector, do not allow objects such as

cloth or paper to lay under the projector.

gg Related Links

• "Installing a Security Cable" p.155

Projector Parts - Control Panel

Name Function

A[Menu] button Displays and closes the projector's menu.

Name Function

B[Home] button Displays and closes the Home screen.

C[Enter] button [ ] Enters the current selection and moves to the next level

while displaying the projector's menu.

When projecting an analog RGB signal from the

Computer port, optimizes the Analog Signal

Adjustment settings (Tracking,Sync., and Position).

DKeystone adjustment

buttons and arrow

buttons

Displays the Keystone screen allowing you to correct

keystone distortion.

Selects menu items while displaying the projector's

menu.

E[Source Search]

button

Changes to the next input source.

F[Esc] button Stops the current function.

Moves back to the previous menu level while

displaying the projector's menu.

GWide/Tele buttons

and arrow buttons

[W]: Enlarges the size of the projected image.

[T]: Reduces the size of the projected image.

Corrects keystone distortion in the horizontal direction

when the Keystone screen is displayed.

Selects menu items while displaying the projector's

menu.

gg Related Links

• "Home Screen" p.50

• "Correcting the Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons" p.61

• "Selecting an Image Source" p.72

• "Resizing the Image with the Buttons" p.70

• "Adjusting the Menu Settings" p.202

Projector Parts and Functions 21

Projector Parts - Remote Control Name Function

APower button [ ] Turns the projector on or off.

B[HDMI] button Switches the image source between the HDMI and

HDBaseT (EB-1485Fi only) ports.

C[Computer] button Switches the image source to the Computer ports.

DNumeric buttons Enters numbers in the projector's menu while holding

down the [Num] button.

E[Auto] button When projecting an analog RGB signal from the

Computer port, optimizes the Analog Signal

Adjustment settings (Tracking,Sync., and Position).

F[Num] button Hold down this button to enter numbers using the

numeric buttons.

G[Menu] button Displays and closes the projector's menu.

HArrow buttons Selects menu items while displaying the projector's

menu.

I[Enter] button [ ] Enters the current selection and moves to the next level

while displaying the projector's menu.

J[User] button Performs settings assigned in the User Button setting

in the projector's Management menu.

K[Color Mode] button Changes the color mode.

L[Aspect] button Changes the aspect mode.

M[E-Zoom] +/–

buttons

Resizes the projected image.

N[A/V Mute] button Turns the video and audio on or off temporarily.

O[Split] button Projects up to four images from different image sources

simultaneously by splitting the projected screen.

P[Home] button Displays and closes the Home screen.

Q[Freeze] button Pauses or resumes images.

R[Volume] up/down

buttons

Adjusts the speaker volume.

S[Default] button Returns the selected setting to its default value.

Projector Parts and Functions 22

Name Function

T[Esc] button Stops the current function.

Moves back to the previous menu level while

displaying the projector's menu.

U[ID] button Hold down this button and press the numeric buttons

to select the ID for the projector you want to operate

using the remote control.

V[LAN] button Switches the image source between the network

connected devices.

W[USB] button Switches the image source between the USB Display

and USB-A port.

X[Source Search]

button

Switches to the next input source.

YRemote control light

emitting area

Outputs remote control signals.

gg Related Links

• "Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode)" p.78

• "Image Aspect Ratio" p.74

• "Home Screen" p.50

• "Selecting an Image Source" p.72

• "Zooming Images" p.132

• "Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily" p.130

• "Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously" p.122

• "Stopping Video Action Temporarily" p.131

• "Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons" p.86

• "Setting the Projector ID" p.138

• "Adjusting the Menu Settings" p.202

Projector Parts - Interactive Pens

Hold the pen to turn it on automatically. Pens turn off automatically after 15

seconds when you put them down.

Name Function

APen tip Replaceable soft pen tip.

If the soft tip is hard to use on a textured surface,

replace it with the hard tip.

aIf you are using an ultra-wide

display screen with an aspect ratio of

16:6, use only the hard pen tip (EB-

1485Fi only).

Projector Parts and Functions 23

Name Function

BBattery indicator Press the button on the side of the pen to indicate the

remaining battery power.

• When the battery is charged, the indicator turns blue

until you release the button.

• When the battery is running low, the indicator

flashes blue until you release the button.

• Does not light when the battery is exhausted. Change

the battery.

CButton Performs function assigned as the Pen Button

Function setting in the projector's Interactive menu.

Press the button to perform a right-click operation

while using the pen as a mouse.

DStrap attachment

point

Allows you to attach a commercially available strap.

EBattery cover Open this cover when replacing the battery.

gg Related Links

• "Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip" p.249

• "Using the Interactive Pens" p.91

• "Installing Batteries in the Pens" p.46

Projector Parts - Pen Stand

Name Function

AFront cover Attach it after installing the pen stand.

BPen tip storage space Keep the pen tips here.

CPen storage space Keep the pens here.

DBattery storage space Keep the AA batteries here.

EScrew holes (for

installation)

The screw holes for securing the pen stand.

FInstallation magnets Magnets used for installation.

Projector Parts and Functions 24

Projector Parts - Control Pad

The Control Pad comes with the EB-1485Fi only.

Name Function

AFront cover To connect cables, open the cover by pulling forward

on the tab at the top of the front cover.

BIndicator lights Indicates the control pad's status.

Power: Lit blue means the power is supplied to the

control pad.

Link: Lit blue means the control pad is communicating

with projector.

Name Function

CPower button [ ] Turns the projector on or off.

DHDMI1/HDMI2

button

Switches the input source to HDBaseT and projects

from the device connected to the HDMI1 or HDMI2

port on the control pad.

EUSB-A port Use to connect a USB storage device.

FUSB-B port Use to connect a USB cable to the computer to use the

interactive pen as a mouse.

GHDMI1/HDMI2 port Inputs video signals from HDMI compatible video

equipment and computers.

This port is compatible with HDCP2.3.

HCable path Route cables through here.

ICable path (upper) Route cables through here.

JScrew holes (for

installation)

The screw holes for securing the control pad.

KHDBaseT port Open a port cover to connect a LAN cable to the

projector.

LUSB-B port Use to connect a computer to the projector using a

USB cable when you connect a USB device to the

control pad.

MPower inlet Use to connect the power cord to the control pad.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Parts - Control Pad" p.24

• "Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad" p.33

• "Connecting a Video Source to the Control Pad" p.36

• "Connecting a USB Flash Drive to the Control Pad" p.38

Projector Parts and Functions 25

Projector Parts - Touch Unit

The Touch Unit comes with the EB-1485Fi only.

Name Function

AScrew holes (for

installation)

The screw holes for securing the Touch Unit.

Remove the rubber caps from the screw holes, attach

the Touch Unit, and replace the rubber caps to hide the

screws.

BLaser diffusion ports Diffuse laser light to detect the position of fingers.

CIndicator light Lit when the Touch Unit is turned on.

DScrew holes (for

installation)

The screw holes for securing the Touch Unit to a

commercially available table mount when installing

vertically on a desk.

ESecurity slot The security slot is compatible with the Microsaver

Security System manufactured by Kensington.

FTCH port Connects the projector to the Touch Unit with the

Touch Unit connection cable.

GInstallation magnets Magnets used for installation.

Attention

• Do not connect the Touch Unit to any devices except for this projector. The

device could malfunction, or laser light could leak beyond the limit.

• Make sure you use the supplied Touch Unit connection cable. Operations are

not possible with a commercially available cable.

• When disposing of the Touch Unit, do not disassemble it. Dispose according to

your local or national laws and regulations.

aSee your projector's Installation Guide for the Touch Unit installation

methods and angle adjustment methods.

gg Related Links

• "Safety Instructions for Interactive Touch Operations" p.94

• "Using Interactive Touch Operations with Your Finger" p.93

Projector Parts and Functions 26

Safety Instructions for Magnet

Both the pen stand and touch unit contain powerful magnets. Be sure to

follow these important guidelines when using these devices.

Warning

Do not use the device near medical equipment such as pace makers. Furthermore,

when using the device, make sure there is no medical equipment such as

pacemakers, in the surrounding area. Electromagnetic interference may cause

medical equipment to malfunction.

Caution

• Do not use the device near magnetic storage media such as magnetic cards, or

precision electronic devices such as computers, digital watches, or cell phones.

Data could be corrupted or a malfunction could occur.

• When installing the device on a magnetic surface, be careful not to trap your

fingers or any other part of your body between the magnet and the installation

surface.

Setting Up the Projector

Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Placement" p.28

• "Projector Connections" p.31

• "Installing Batteries in the Remote Control" p.45

• "Installing Batteries in the Pens" p.46

• "Remote Control Operation" p.47

Projector Placement 28

You can install the projector on a wall or ceiling, or place it on a table to

project images.

To install the projector on a wall, you must use an optional mount. To mount

the projector from a ceiling or vertically on a desk, you can use a

commercially available mount compatible with the VESA Mounting Interface

Standard (100 × 100 mm).

Note the following points when selecting a projector location:

• Place the projector on a sturdy, level surface or install it using a compatible

mount.

• Leave plenty of space around and under the projector for ventilation, and

do not place it on top of or next to anything that could block the vents.

• Place the projector so it squarely faces the screen, not at an angle.

aIf you cannot install the projector squarely facing the screen, correct

any resulting keystone distortion using the projector controls. For the

best quality images, we recommend adjusting the installation position

of the projector to achieve the correct image size and shape.

• When you install the projector to a fixed location, turn on the Fixed

Installation setting in the projector's Installation menu.

• When you place the projector vertically, turn on the Vertical Installation

setting in the projector's Installation menu.

Warning

• A special method of installation is required when suspending the projector from

a wall or ceiling. If you do not install the projector correctly, it could fall and

cause damage or injury.

• Do not use adhesives on the wall mount plate fixing points or other mount

fixing points to prevent the screws from loosening, or use lubricants, oils, or

similar substances on the projector; the projector case may crack causing it to fall

from its mount. This could cause serious injury to anyone under the mount and

could damage the projector.

• Do not cover the projector's air intake or air exhaust vents. If the vents are

covered, the internal temperature could rise and cause a fire.

• Do not install the projector on an unstable surface or in a location beyond the

weight specifications of the projector. Otherwise, it could fall or topple causing

an accident and injury.

• When installing the projector in a high position, take measures to prevent falling

by using wires to ensure safety in an emergency, such as an earthquake, and to

prevent accidents. If it is not installed correctly, it could fall causing an accident

and injury.

Attention

• If you are using the projector at altitudes above 1500 m, set the High Altitude

Mode setting to On in the projector's Installation menu to ensure the projector's

internal temperature is regulated properly.

• Try not to setup the projector in locations subject to high humidity and dust, or

in locations subject to smoke from fires or tobacco smoke.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Setup and Installation Options" p.28

• "Settings when Using the Interactive Features" p.29

Projector Setup and Installation Options

You can set up or install your projector in the following ways:

Projector Placement 29

Front/Rear

Front Upside Down/Rear Upside Down

Front Upside Down/Rear Upside Down (Vertically)

Select the correct Projection option in the projector's Installation menu

according to the installation method being used. If necessary, turn on the Inv

Direction Button setting in the projector's Operation menu and adjust the

Menu Rotation setting in the projector's Display menu.

a• The default Projection setting is Front/Upside Down.

• You can change the Projection setting as follows by pressing down

the [A/V Mute] button on the remote control for about five seconds.

• Switch Front to/from Front/Upside Down

• Switch Rear to/from Rear/Upside Down

gg Related Links

• "Projection Modes" p.55

• "Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control" p.55

• "Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus" p.55

Settings when Using the Interactive Features

When using the interactive features, project from in front of the screen.

Set Projection to Front/Upside Down or Front.

Projector Placement 30

Attention

The interactive features are operated using infrared communication. Note the

following points when installing the projector.

• Do not install the projector tilted at an angle of 3˚ or more. The interactive

features may not operate correctly.

• Make sure there is no strong light or sunlight shining on the interactive pen

receiver, the projection screen, the projector itself, or the rear of the projector.

• Do not install the projector where it could be subjected to direct sunlight

through a window. This could cause the interactive features to malfunction.

• Install the projector so that the interactive pen receiver is not too close to

fluorescent lights. If the surrounding area is too bright, the interactive features

may not operate correctly.

• If there is any dust stuck to the interactive pen receiver, it could interfere with

infrared communication and the interactive features may not operate correctly.

Clean the receiver if it is dirty.

• Do not put paint or any stickers on the cover of the interactive pen receiver.

• When using the interactive features, do not use an infrared remote control or

microphone in the same room. The interactive pen could malfunction.

• Do not use devices that generate powerful noise, such as rotary devices or

transformers, near the projector, as the interactive features may not operate

correctly.

a• We recommend using a smooth, board type screen without any

unevenness. If the projection screen is uneven, there may be

distortions in the projected image.

• Distortions may occur in the projected image depending on the

material of the screen and the installation method.

• When using the interactive features, install the projector so that the

projected screen is a rectangle without any distortion.

• When using the interactive features in the same room as multiple

projectors, interactive pen operations may become unstable. In this

case, connect the optional remote control cable set to the projectors,

and change Sync of Projectors to Wired in the projector's

Pen/Touch menu.

sPen/Touch >Installation of Projectors >Sync of Projectors

gg Related Links

• "Settings when Using the Touch Unit" p.30

• "Connecting a Computer for Use with PC Interactive Features" p.35

Settings when Using the Touch Unit

When using the Touch Unit, install the projector using one of the following

methods. The Touch Unit cannot be used if another installation method is

used.

• Mount the projector on a wall or suspend it from a ceiling and project

images from in front of the screen (the setting plate or a commercially

available ceiling mount is required).

• Install vertically on a desk and project from the front of the desk (a

commercially available table mount is required).

gg Related Links

• "Safety Instructions for Interactive Touch Operations" p.94

• "Using Interactive Touch Operations with Your Finger" p.93

Projector Connections 31

You can connect the projector to a variety of computer, video, and audio

sources to display presentations, movies, or other images, with or without

sound.

Attention

Check the shape and orientation of the connectors on any cable you plan to

connect. Do not force a connector into a port if it does not fit. The device or your

projector could be damaged or could malfunction.

aSee the Quick Start Guide for a list of cables supplied with your

projector. Purchase optional or commercially available cables when

necessary.

• Connect a computer that has a USB port, standard video output (monitor)

port, or HDMI port.

• For video projection, connect devices such as DVD players, gaming

consoles, digital cameras, and smartphones with compatible video output

ports.

• If your presentation or video includes sound, you can connect audio input

cables.

• For slide shows or presentations without a computer, you can connect USB

devices (such as a flash drive or camera) or the optional Epson document

camera.

gg Related Links

• "Connecting to a Computer" p.31

• "Connecting to Video Sources" p.35

• "Connecting to External USB Devices" p.37

• "Connecting to a Document Camera" p.39

• "Connecting a Printer" p.39

• "Connecting to External Output Devices" p.39

• "Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model" p.42

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Connecting to a Computer

Follow the instructions in these sections to connect a computer to the

projector.

gg Related Links

• "Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video and Audio" p.31

• "Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio" p.32

• "Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio" p.33

• "Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad" p.33

• "Connecting to a Mini PC Installed on a Wall Plate" p.34

• "Connecting a Computer for Use with PC Interactive Features" p.35

Connecting to a Computer for VGA Video and Audio

You can connect the projector to your computer using a VGA computer

cable.

You can play sound through the projector's speaker system by connecting a

commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack audio cable.

a• To connect a computer that does not have a VGA video port, you

need an adapter that allows you to connect to the projector's VGA

video port.

• To project an image source connected to the Computer2/Monitor

Out port, set Monitor Out Port to Computer2 in the projector's

Signal I/O menu.

• You can also set the port to input audio when projecting the

computer source as the Audio Output setting in the projector's

Signal I/O menu.

• Make sure the audio cable is labeled "No resistance".

aConnect the VGA computer cable to your computer's monitor port.

Projector Connections 32

bConnect the other end to a Computer port on the projector.

cTighten the screws on the VGA connector.

dConnect the audio cable to your laptop's headphone or audio-out jack,

or your desktop's speaker or audio-out port.

eConnect the other end to the Audio port that corresponds to the

Computer port you are using.

Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio

If your computer meets the system requirements, you can send video and

audio output to the projector through the computer's USB port. This function

is called USB Display. Connect the projector to your computer using a USB

cable.

a• If you use a USB hub, the connection may not operate correctly.

Connect the USB cable directly to the projector.

• To use the USB Display function, set the USB Display setting to On

in the projector's Signal I/O menu.

aConnect the cable to your projector's USB-B1 port.

bConnect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.

cTurn on the projector and your computer.

dDo one of the following to install the Epson USB Display software:

aYou only need to install this software the first time you connect

the projector to the computer.

• Windows: Select Run EMP_UDSE.EXE in the dialog box that is

displayed to install the Epson USB Display software.

• Mac: The Epson USB Display setup folder is displayed on your

screen. Select USB Display Installer and follow the on-screen

instructions to install the Epson USB Display software. If the USB

Display Setup folder is not displayed automatically, double-click

EPSON_PJ_UD >USB Display Installer.

eFollow any on-screen instructions.

Projector Connections 33

Do not disconnect the USB cable or turn off the projector until the

projector displays an image.

The projector displays the image from your computer's desktop and outputs

sound if your presentation contains audio.

a• If the projector does not project any images, do one of the following:

• Windows: Click All Programs >EPSON Projector >Epson USB

Display >Epson USB Display Ver.x.xx.

• Mac: Double-click the USB Display icon in the Application folder.

• When you finish projection, do one of the following:

• Windows: Disconnect the USB cable. You do not need to operate

Safely Remove Hardware.

• Mac: Select Disconnect from the USB Display icon menu on the

menu bar or Dock, and then disconnect the USB cable.

gg Related Links

• "USB Display System Requirements" p.286

Connecting to a Computer for HDMI Video and Audio

If your computer has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector using

an HDMI cable and send the computer's audio with the projected image.

aTo connect a Mac that does not have an HDMI port, you need an

adapter that allows you to connect to the projector's HDMI port.

Contact Apple for compatible adapter options. Older Mac computers

(2009 and earlier) may not support audio through the HDMI port.

aConnect the HDMI cable to your computer's HDMI output port.

bConnect the other end to the projector's HDMI port.

aIf you have problems hearing audio through the HDMI connection,

connect one end of a commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack

audio cable to the projector's Audio port and the other end to your

computer's audio out port. Select the audio input port you connected

to as the HDMI Audio Output setting in the projector's Signal I/O

menu.

Connecting a Computer to the Control Pad

If your computer has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector using

an HDMI cable and send the computer's audio with the projected image

through the control pad (EB-1485Fi only).

aTo connect a Mac that does not have an HDMI port, you need an

adapter that allows you to connect to the projector's HDMI port.

Contact Apple for compatible adapter options. Older Mac computers

(2009 and earlier) may not support audio through the HDMI port.

aConnect the projector to the control pad.

See your projector's Installation Guide for details on the cable

connection between the projector and the control pad.

bTurn on the projector and your computer.

Projector Connections 34

cConnect HDMI cable to the HDMI1 or HDMI2 port on the bottom of

the control pad and any available HDMI port on your computer.

dPress the HDMI1 or HDMI2 button on the control pad to select the

input device.

The projector switches the input source to HDBaseT, displays the image from

your computer's desktop, and outputs sound, if your presentation contains

audio.

gg Related Links

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Connecting to a Mini PC Installed on a Wall Plate

You can connect your projector to a mini PC that is installed on a wall plate.

Attention

Do not cover the mini PC's air intake vents or air exhaust vents. If the vents are

covered, the internal temperature could rise and malfunction.

aConnect the mini PC and the projector's HDMI port using the HDMI

cable.

bIf you use the interactive features, connect the USB cable to your

projector's USB-B2 port.

cConnect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.

dTurn on the projector and your computer.

eIf you connected a USB cable, set the USB-B2 setting in the Pen/Touch

menu to the HDMI port you used to connect your mini PC to the

projector.

sPen/Touch >PC Interactivity >USB-B2

Projector Connections 35

aIf you have problems hearing audio through the HDMI connection,

connect one end of a commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack

audio cable to the projector's Audio port and the other end to your

computer's audio out port. Select the audio input port you connected

to as the HDMI Audio Output setting in the projector's Signal I/O

menu.

Connecting a Computer for Use with PC Interactive Features

When the projector is connected to a computer with a USB cable, you can

operate the computer from the projected screen using the interactive pens or

your finger, just as you would with a mouse. You can navigate, select, and

interact with your computer programs from the projected screen.

aIf you use a USB hub, the connection may not operate correctly.

Connect the USB cable directly to the projector.

aConnect the computer to your projector using an image signal cable

other than a USB cable.

bConnect a USB cable to your projector's USB-B1 port.

cConnect the other end to any available USB port on your computer.

Connecting to Video Sources

Follow the instructions in these sections to connect video devices to the

projector.

a• If the port on the device you connect has an unusual shape, use the

cable supplied with the device or an optional cable to connect to the

projector.

• The cable differs depending on the output signal from the connected

video devices.

• Some video devices are capable of outputting different types of

signals. See your video device manual to confirm what type of signals

can be output.

gg Related Links

• "Connecting to an HDMI Video Source" p.35

• "Connecting to a Composite Video Source" p.36

• "Connecting a Video Source to the Control Pad" p.36

Connecting to an HDMI Video Source

If your video source has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector

using an HDMI cable and send the image source's audio with the projected

image.

Attention

Do not turn on the video source before connecting it to the projector. Doing so

could damage the projector.

aConnect the HDMI cable to your video source's HDMI output port.

Projector Connections 36

bConnect the other end to the projector's HDMI port.

aIf you have problems hearing audio through the HDMI connection,

connect one end of a commercially available 3.5 mm stereo mini-jack

audio cable to the projector's Audio port and the other end to your

video source's audio out port. Select the audio input port you

connected to as the HDMI Audio Output setting in the projector's

Signal I/O menu.

Connecting to a Composite Video Source

If your video source has a composite video port, you can connect it to the

projector using a RCA-style video or A/V cable.

You can play sound through the projector's speaker system by connecting a

stereo mini-jack audio cable.

aMake sure the audio cable is labeled "No resistance".

aConnect the cable with the yellow connector to your video source's

yellow video output port.

bConnect the other end to the projector's Video port.

cConnect the audio cable to your video source's audio-out ports.

dConnect the other end to the projector's Audio port.

Connecting a Video Source to the Control Pad

If your video source has an HDMI port, you can connect it to the projector

using an HDMI cable and send the image source's audio with the projected

image through the control pad (EB-1485Fi only).

Attention

Do not turn on the video source before connecting it to the projector. Doing so

could damage the projector.

Projector Connections 37

aConnect the projector to the control pad.

See your projector's Installation Guide for details on the cable

connection between the projector and the control pad.

bTurn on the projector and your video source.

cConnect HDMI cable to the HDMI1 or HDMI2 port on the bottom of

the control pad and any available HDMI port on your video source.

dPress the HDMI1 or HDMI2 button on the control pad to select the

input device.

The projector switches the input source to HDBaseT, displays the image from

your video source, and outputs sound, if your presentation contains audio.

gg Related Links

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Connecting to External USB Devices

Follow the instructions in these sections to connect external USB devices to

the projector.

gg Related Links

• "USB Device Projection" p.37

• "Connecting to a USB Device" p.38

• "Connecting a USB Flash Drive to the Control Pad" p.38

• "Disconnecting a USB Device" p.39

USB Device Projection

You can project images and other content without using a computer or video

device by connecting any of these devices to your projector:

• USB flash drive

• Digital camera or smartphone

• USB hard drive

a• Digital cameras or smartphones must be USB-mounted devices, not

TWAIN-compliant devices, and must be USB Mass Storage Class-

compliant.

• USB hard drives must meet these requirements:

• USB Mass Storage Class-compliant (not all USB Mass Storage

Class devices are supported)

• Formatted in FAT16/32

• Self-powered by their own AC power supplies (bus-powered hard

drives are not recommended)

• Avoid using hard drives with multiple partitions

You can project slide shows from image files on a connected USB device.

gg Related Links

• "Projecting a PC Free Presentation" p.125

Projector Connections 38

Connecting to a USB Device

You can connect your USB device to the projector's USB-A port and use it to

project images and other content.

aIf your USB device came with a power adapter, plug the device into an

electrical outlet.

bConnect the USB cable or USB flash drive to the projector's USB-A port

as shown.

Attention

• Use the USB cable supplied with or specified for use with the device.

• Do not connect a USB hub or a USB cable longer than 3 meters, or the

device may not operate correctly.

aSelect USB1 as the image source when you connect a USB device

to one of the USB-A ports.

cConnect the other end to your device, if necessary.

Connecting a USB Flash Drive to the Control Pad

You can connect your USB flash drive to the USB-A port on the control pad

and use it to project images and other content.

aYou can also connect a USB flash drive directly to the projector's USB-

A port.

aConnect the projector to the control pad.

See your projector's Installation Guide for details on the cable

connection between the projector and the control pad.

aMake sure that the projector and the control pad are connected

with the USB cable.

bConnect the USB flash drive into the USB-A port on the bottom of the

control pad.

aSelect USB1 as the image source to project images on the USB

flash drive.

gg Related Links

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Projector Connections 39

Disconnecting a USB Device

When you have finished presenting with a connected USB device, disconnect

the device from the control pad or projector.

aTurn off and unplug the device, if necessary.

bDisconnect the USB device from the control pad or projector.

Connecting to a Document Camera

You can connect a document camera to your projector to project images

viewed by the camera.

The connection method varies depending on your Epson document camera

model. See the document camera manual for details.

a• Select USB2 as the image source when you connect a USB document

camera to one of the USB-A ports.

• You cannot use multiple USB document cameras at the same time.

gg Related Links

• "Controlling a Document Camera" p.116

Connecting a Printer

You can connect an Epson printer or all-in-one device to the USB-A port and

use it to print your projected and annotated content from the whiteboard.

a• Make sure the printer meets the control command requirements.

• You can also connect a network printer through the Print setting in

the projector's Interactive menu.

• You can also connect a printer through the control pad.

aConnect the USB cable to projector's USB-A port on the projector.

Make sure the cable is no longer than 5 m.

bConnect the other end of the cable to printer's USB type B port.

gg Related Links

• "Printing Drawing Contents" p.110

Connecting to External Output Devices

Follow the instructions in these sections to connect external devices to the

projector.

gg Related Links

• "Connecting to an External HDMI Monitor" p.39

• "Connecting to a VGA Monitor" p.40

• "Connecting to External Speakers" p.41

• "Connecting a Microphone" p.41

Connecting to an External HDMI Monitor

You can connect an external HDMI monitor to the projector's HDMI Out

port and use it to display the drawing content you create in whiteboard mode.

Projector Connections 40

a• You can display drawing content and images from the current input

source (except the Home screen and images from a Screen Mirroring

source) on an external HDMI monitor.

• You can display the whole whiteboard screen during split screen

projection.

• There is a delay for whiteboard images displayed on an external

HDMI monitor.

aConnect the HDMI cable to your monitor's HDMI input port.

bConnect the other end to the projector's HDMI Out port.

Connecting to a VGA Monitor

If you connected the projector to a computer using a Computer port, you can

also connect an external monitor to the projector. This lets you see your

presentation on the external monitor even when the projected image is not

visible.

a• If you want to output images to an external monitor when the

projector is turned off, set the A/V Output setting to Always On in

the projector's Signal I/O menu.

• To output images to an external monitor, set Monitor Out Port to

Monitor Out in the projector's Signal I/O menu.

• Content drawn on the screen using the interactive features is not

displayed on an external monitor. To display the drawn content on

an external monitor, use Easy Interactive Tools.

• Monitors that use a refresh rate of less than 60 Hz may not be able to

display images correctly.

aMake sure your computer is connected to the projector's Computer

port.

a• If there are two computer ports, make sure you use the

Computer1 port.

• Only analog RGB signals from the Computer1 port can be

output to an external monitor. You cannot output signals

input from other ports.

bConnect the external monitor's cable to your projector's Monitor Out

port.

Projector Connections 41

Connecting to External Speakers

To enhance the sound from your presentation, you can connect the projector

to external self-powered speakers. You can control the volume using the

projector's remote control.

To output audio from external speakers, set the Audio Out Device setting to

AV System in the projector's Signal I/O menu. When an audio/video system

is not connected to the projector, audio is output from the external speakers

even if Audio Out Device is set to AV System.

sSignal I/O >HDMI Link >Audio Out Device

a• If you want to output audio from the external speakers when the

projector is turned off, set the A/V Output setting to Always On in

the projector's Signal I/O menu.

• You can also connect the projector to an amplifier with speakers.

• The projector's built-in speaker system is disabled when you connect

external speakers.

aMake sure your computer or video source is connected to the projector

with both audio and video cables as necessary.

bLocate the appropriate cable to connect your external speakers, such as

a stereo mini-jack-to-pin-jack cable, or another type of cable or adapter.

cConnect one end of the cable to your external speakers as necessary.

dConnect the stereo mini-jack end of the cable to your projector's Audio

Out port.

Connecting a Microphone

You can connect a microphone to the projector's Mic port to provide audio

support during presentations.

If you want to output audio from a microphone when the projector is turned

off, set the A/V Output setting to Always On in the projector's Signal I/O

menu.

a• Plug-in-power is not supported.

• Adjust the Mic Input Level setting in the projector's Signal I/O

menu if the microphone audio is difficult to hear, or if it is too loud

resulting in a crackling sound.

aConnect the microphone cable to the projector's Mic port.

Projector Connections 42

bTurn on the microphone, if necessary.

Connecting Multiple Projectors of the Same Model

You can create a single unified image projected from multiple projectors (EB-

1485Fi only). The image is unified horizontally.

aConnect the computer and the projectors using HDMI cables as shown.

aIf you are connecting three or more projectors, connect the

projectors in a chain as shown.

bIf you will use interactive features, connect one end of the cable to the

SYNC OUT port on one projector, and connect the other end to the

SYNC IN port on the other projector as shown.

aIf you are connecting three or more projectors, you cannot use

the interactive features.

cIf you will use interactive features, connect the computer and the

projectors using USB cables as shown.

dPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

Projector Connections 43

eSelect the necessary HDMI Out Setting and Sync of Projectors settings

in the projector's menus. See the list of settings for more details.

fSelect the necessary settings in the projector's Multi-Projection menu

to create a seamless unified image area (EB-1485Fi only).

gIf you will use interactive features, set the EDID setting to

3240×1080/60Hz in the projector's Signal I/O menu.

hSelect the necessary settings in the projector's Pen/Touch menu to

calibrate the interactive pen position and finger touch position.

See your projector's Installation Guide for instructions on calibrating

the interactive pen and finger touch positions.

iPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

gg Related Links

• "Menu Settings for Multiple Projector Connections" p.43

• "Blending the Image Edges" p.142

• "Adjusting the Black Level" p.145

• "Scaling an Image" p.149

• "Adjusting Color Uniformity" p.140

• "Matching the Image Colors" p.144

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Menu Settings for Multiple Projector Connections

For Use with Interactive Features (EB-1485Fi only)

See the following tables for more details on menu settings when you connect

multiple projectors and use the interactive feature in a unified image area.

When you use the interactive features, you can connect two projectors in a

chain.

Multi-Projection Settings

Setting Item A B

Projector on the left

(connected to the

computer)

Projector on the right

HDMI Out Setting Process Out Process Out

Order Specifies the position of this projector in number order

from left to right

Connect Computer Yes No

Edge Blending > Any

Edges > Blend Start

Position

0 0

Edge Blending > Any

Edges > Blend Range

600 600

Projector Connections 44

Pen/Touch Settings

Setting Item A B

Projector on the left

(connected to the

computer)

Projectors on the right

Installation of Projectors >

Sync of Projectors

Wired Wired

aIf you are using the projector in the same room as another projector

that does not support cable connection, set the Infrared Intensity

setting to Strong.

Signal I/O Settings

Setting Item A B

Projector on the left

(connected to the

computer)

Projectors on the right

EDID 3240×1080/60Hz 3240×1080/60Hz

For Use without Interactive Features

See the following tables for more details on menu settings when you connect

multiple projectors to create a horizontally wide screen without the interactive

feature. When you do not use the interactive features, you can connect up to

four projectors in a chain.

Multi-Projection Settings

Setting Item A B C

Projector on the left

(connected to the

computer)

Projectors in the

middle

Projector on the

right

HDMI Out Setting Pass Through Pass Through Pass Through

Number of

Projectors

Specifies the number of projectors connected in a chain

Order Specifies the position of this projector in number order from

left to right

Installing Batteries in the Remote Control 45

The remote control uses the two AA batteries that came with the projector.

Attention

Make sure you read the Safety Instructions before handling the batteries.

aRemove the battery cover as shown.

bRemove the old batteries, if necessary.

aDispose of used batteries according to local regulations.

cInsert the batteries with the +and –ends facing as shown.

Warning

Check the positions of the (+) and (–) marks inside the battery holder to

ensure the batteries are inserted the correct way. If the batteries are not used

correctly, they could explode or leak causing a fire, injury, or damage to the

product.

dReplace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.

Installing Batteries in the Pens 46

The Interactive pen uses one AA manganese battery, AA alkaline battery, or

Eneloop (BK-3MCC) rechargeable battery.

When the battery is low, the pen indicator flashes when you press the button

on the side of the pen. When the battery runs out, the pen indicator turns off.

Replace the battery as soon as it runs out.

Attention

Make sure you read the Safety Instructions before handling the battery.

aOpen the battery cover as shown.

bRemove the old batteries, if necessary.

aDispose of used batteries according to local regulations.

cInsert the battery with the + and – ends facing as shown.

Warning

Check the positions of the (+) and (–) marks inside the battery holder to

ensure the battery are inserted the correct way. If the battery is not used

correctly, it could explode or leak causing a fire, injury, or damage to the

product.

dReplace the battery cover and press it down until it clicks into place.

Remote Control Operation 47

The remote control lets you control the projector from almost anywhere in

the room.

Make sure that you aim the remote control at the projector's receivers within

the distance and angles listed here.

aAvoid using the remote control in conditions with bright fluorescent

lights or in direct sunlight, or the projector may not respond to

commands. If you are not going to use the remote control for a long

time, remove the batteries.

Using Basic Projector Features

Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's basic features.

gg Related Links

• "Turning On the Projector" p.49

• "Turning Off the Projector" p.51

• "Setting the Date and Time" p.52

• "Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus" p.54

• "Projection Modes" p.55

• "Setting the Screen Type" p.57

• "Focusing the Image" p.59

• "Image Shape" p.61

• "Resizing the Image with the Buttons" p.70

• "Adjusting the Image Position" p.71

• "Selecting an Image Source" p.72

• "Image Aspect Ratio" p.74

• "Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode)" p.78

• "Adjusting the Image Color" p.80

• "Adjusting the Brightness" p.83

• "Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons" p.86

• "Inverting the Audio Channels" p.87

Turning On the Projector 49

Turn on the computer or video equipment you want to use after you turn on

the projector.

aConnect the power cord to the projector's power inlet and plug it into

an electrical outlet.

The projector's power indicator turns blue. This indicates that the

projector is receiving power, but is not yet turned on (it is in standby

mode).

bPress the power button on the projector or remote control to turn on

the projector.

The projector beeps and the status indicator flashes blue as the

projector warms up. Once the projector is warmed up, the status

indicator stops flashing and turns blue.

a• You can also press the power button on the control pad.

• When Quick Startup is enabled in the projector's Operation

menu, the projector becomes ready for use in several seconds

the next time you press the power button.

Try the following if you do not see a projected image.

• Turn on the connected computer or video device.

• Change the screen output from the computer when using a laptop

computer.

• Insert a DVD or other video media, and press play (if necessary).

• Press the [Source Search] button on the control panel or remote control to

detect the source.

• Press the button for the desired video source on the remote control.

• If the Home screen is displayed, select the source you want to project.

Warning

• Never look into the projector lens when the light source is on. This can damage

your eyes and is especially dangerous for children.

• When turning on the projector at a distance using the remote control, make sure

there is no one looking into the lens.

• If the light from the projector is blocked, the area on which the light shines

becomes hot which could cause it to melt, burn, or start a fire. Also, the lens may

get hot due to the reflected light which could cause the projector to malfunction.

To stop projection, use the A/V Mute function, or turn off the projector.

a• When the Direct Power On setting is set to On in the projector's

Operation menu, the projector turns on as soon as you plug it in.

Note that the projector also turns on automatically in cases such as

recovery from a power outage.

• If you select a specific port as the Auto Power On setting in the

projector's Operation menu, the projector turns on as soon as it

detects a signal or cable connection from that port.

Turning On the Projector 50

gg Related Links

• "Home Screen" p.50

• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.213

Home Screen

The Home screen feature allows you to easily select an image source and

access useful functions. You can display the Home screen by pressing the

[Home] button on the control panel or remote control. The Home screen is

also displayed when you turn on the projector and no signal is being input.

Press the arrow buttons on the control panel or remote control to select a

menu item, and then press [Enter].

You can also select menu items using the interactive pen or your finger.

ASelects the source you want to project.

A check mark appears on the upper right of the current input source.

You can check a preview of the current input image for most sources as a

thumbnail.

BTurns off the projector.

CCloses the home screen.

DStarts the whiteboard mode.

EProjects images from two or four different image sources simultaneously in a

grid format.

FShares your projected screen image with other projectors connected to the same

network.

GDisplays the Connection Guide. You can select the wireless connection methods

according to the devices you are using, such as smartphones or computers.

HLets you select the following common projector settings (settings may vary

depending on other selected settings):

•Color Mode

•Brightness Level

•Volume

•Geometry Correction (H/V-Keystone and Quick Corner are available.)

•Auto Calibration

•Aspect

IMoves to the previous or next page if there are more than nine available input

sources.

JDisplays the projector name and the projector keyword.

KDisplays the current time.

aThe Home screen disappears after 10 minutes of inactivity.

gg Related Links

• "Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)" p.96

• "Screen Sharing" p.179

• "Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously" p.122

Turning Off the Projector 51

Turn off the projector after use.

a• Turn off this product when it is not in use to prolong the life of the

projector. Light source life varies depending on the mode selected,

environmental conditions, and usage. Brightness decreases over time.

• If the Light Source Calibration setting is set to Run Periodically in

the projector's Management menu, light source calibration starts

automatically if you turn off the projector and the following

conditions are present:

• 100 hours have passed since the last light source calibration

• You have used the projector continuously for more than 20

minutes

aPress the power button on the control panel or remote control.

aYou can also press the power button on the control pad.

The projector displays a shutdown confirmation screen.

bPress the power button again. (To leave it on, press any other button.)

The projector beeps twice, the light source turns off, and the status

indicator turns off.

cTo transport or store the projector, make sure the power indicator is

blue (but not flashing) and the status indicator is off, then unplug the

power cord.

Setting the Date and Time 52

You can set the date and time for the projector.

aTurn on the projector.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Management setting and press [Enter].

dSelect the Date & Time setting and press [Enter].

eSelect the Date & Time setting and press [Enter].

You see this screen:

fSelect Date, press [Enter], and use the displayed keyboard to enter

today's date.

gSelect Time, press [Enter], and use the displayed keyboard to enter the

current time.

hSelect Time Difference (UTC), press [Enter], and set the time

difference from Coordinated Universal Time.

iWhen you are finished, select Set and press [Enter].

Setting the Date and Time 53

jTo activate daylight saving time, select the Daylight Saving Time

setting and set it to On. Then select settings.

kWhen you are finished, select Set and press [Enter].

lTo update the time automatically through an Internet time server,

select the Internet Time setting and set it to On. Then select settings.

mWhen you are finished, select Set and press [Enter].

nPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

Selecting the Language for the Projector Menus 54

If you want to view the projector's menus and messages in another language,

you can change the Language setting.

aTurn on the projector.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Management setting and press [Enter].

dSelect the Language setting and press [Enter].

eSelect the language you want to use and press [Enter].

fPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

Projection Modes 55

Depending on how you positioned the projector, you may need to change the

projection mode so your images project correctly.

•Front lets you project from a table in front of the screen.

•Front/Upside Down flips the image over top-to-bottom to project upside-

down from a wall mount or ceiling.

•Rear flips the image horizontally to project from behind a translucent

screen.

•Rear/Upside Down flips the image over top-to-bottom and horizontally to

project from a wall mount or ceiling and behind a translucent screen.

gg Related Links

• "Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote Control" p.55

• "Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus" p.55

• "Projector Setup and Installation Options" p.28

Changing the Projection Mode Using the Remote

Control

You can change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

bHold down the [A/V Mute] button on the remote control for 5 seconds.

The image disappears briefly and reappears flipped top-to-bottom.

cTo change projection back to the original mode, hold down the [A/V

Mute] button for 5 seconds again.

Changing the Projection Mode Using the Menus

You can change the projection mode to flip the image over top-to-bottom

and/or left-to-right using the projector menus.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

Projection Modes 56

cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Projection and press [Enter].

eSelect a projection mode and press [Enter].

fPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

Setting the Screen Type 57

You can use the Screen Type setting to match the aspect ratio of the displayed

image to the screen you are using.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Screen Type and press [Enter].

eSelect your screen's aspect ratio and press [Enter].

fPress [Menu] to exit the menus.

gAdjust the aspect ratio for the projected image, if necessary.

gg Related Links

• "Adjusting the Image Position Using Screen Position" p.57

Adjusting the Image Position Using Screen Position

You can adjust the image position if there are margins between the edge of

the image and the projected screen frame.

aYou cannot adjust the screen position if the Screen Type setting is set

to 16:9.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

Setting the Screen Type 58

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Screen Position, and press [Enter].

eUse the arrow buttons on the control panel or remote control to adjust

the position of the image.

fWhen you are finished, press [Menu].

Focusing the Image 59

You can display the test pattern, and then adjust the focus.

aWe recommend adjusting the focus at least 20 minutes after you start

projecting, because images are not stable right after turning on the

projector.

aTurn on the projector.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Test Pattern and press [Enter].

eOpen the front cover.

Focusing the Image 60

fMove the focus lever and focus to the center-bottom of the projected

screen. gCheck that the focus matches the corners of the projected screen.

aIf any areas are out of focus, use the focus lever to adjust until

the corners are the same focus.

hTo remove the test pattern, press [Esc].

Image Shape 61

You can project an even, rectangular image by placing the projector directly

in front of the center of the screen and keeping it level. If you place the

projector at an angle to the screen, or tilt it up or down, or off to the side, you

may need to correct the image shape.

After correction, your image is slightly smaller.

For the best quality images, we recommend adjusting the installation position

of the projector to achieve the correct image size and shape.

aYou cannot correct an image shape using multiple correction methods

at the same time.

gg Related Links

• "Correcting the Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons" p.61

• "Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner" p.62

• "Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction" p.64

• "Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction" p.66

• "Loading Image Shape Setting from Memory" p.68

• "Correcting Image Shape with Corner Markers" p.68

Correcting the Image Shape with the Keystone

Buttons

You can use the projector's keystone correction buttons to correct the shape

of an image that is unevenly rectangular.

You can use keystone buttons to correct images up to 3º right, left, up, or

down.

aIf you change the Screen Type setting or adjust the image position, the

adjustments are reset.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

bPress one of the keystone adjustment buttons on the control panel to

display the Keystone adjustment screen.

Image Shape 62

cPress a keystone button to adjust the image shape.

a• If the projector is installed out of your reach, you can also correct the

shape of the image using the remote control.

sInstallation >Geometry Correction >H/V-Keystone

• To save the current shape of an image you have adjusted, select Save

Memory. You can save up to three image shapes in the memory.

sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Memory >Save Memory

gg Related Links

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner

You can use the projector's Quick Corner setting to correct the shape and size

of an image that is unevenly rectangular.

aIf you change the Screen Type setting or adjust the image position, the

adjustments are reset.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

Image Shape 63

cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Geometry Correction and press [Enter].

eSelect Quick Corner and press [Enter]. Then press [Enter] again if

necessary.

You see the area selection screen.

fUse the arrow buttons to select the area of the image you want to

adjust. Then press [Enter].

aTo reset the Quick Corner corrections, hold down [Esc] for

about two seconds while the area selection screen is displayed,

and then select Yes.

gPress the arrow buttons to adjust the image shape as necessary.

To return to the area selection screen, press [Enter].

Image Shape 64

a• You can also select the area by pressing the following numeric

buttons on the remote control:

• [1] selects the upper left area.

• [3] selects the upper right area.

• [7] selects the lower left area.

• [9] selects the lower right area.

• If you see this screen, you cannot adjust the shape any further

in the direction indicated by the gray triangle.

hRepeat steps 6 and 7 as needed to adjust any remaining corners.

iWhen you are finished, press [Esc].

The Geometry Correction setting is now set to Quick Corner in the

projector's Installation menu. The next time you press the keystone

adjustment buttons on the control panel, the area selection screen is

displayed.

aTo save the current shape of an image you have adjusted, select Save

Memory. You can save up to three image shapes in the memory.

sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Memory >Save Memory

gg Related Links

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction

You can use the projector's Arc Correction setting to adjust the shape of an

image projected on a curved or spherical surface.

aIf you change the Screen Type setting or adjust the image position, the

adjustments are reset.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

Image Shape 65

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Geometry Correction and press [Enter].

eSelect Arc Correction and press [Enter].

You see the area selection screen.

fUse the arrow buttons to select the area of the image you want to

adjust, then press [Enter].

Image Shape 66

gPress the arrow buttons to adjust the image shape of the selected area as

necessary.

To return to the area selection screen, press [Enter].

aIf you see this screen, you cannot adjust the shape any further in

the direction indicated by the gray triangle.

hRepeat steps 6 and 7 as needed to adjust any remaining corners.

iWhen you are finished, press [Esc].

a• To save the current shape of an image you have adjusted, select Save

Memory. You can save up to three image shapes in the memory.

sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Memory >Save Memory

• To reset the Arc Correction settings, hold down [Esc] for about two

seconds while the area selection screen is displayed, and then select

Yes.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction

You can use the projector's Point Correction setting to fine-tune the image

shape in portions of an image. The image is divided into a grid which allows

you to move intersection points on the grid as necessary to correct distortion.

aIf you change the Screen Type setting or adjust the image position, the

adjustments are reset.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

Image Shape 67

cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Geometry Correction and press [Enter].

eSelect Point Correction and press [Enter].

fSelect the point number and press [Enter].

You see the grid on the projected image.

aIf you want to change the grid color for visibility, select a

different Pattern Color setting.

gUse the arrow buttons to move to the point you want to correct, then

press [Enter].

hUse the arrow buttons to correct distortion as necessary.

iTo correct any remaining points, press [Esc] to return to the previous

screen, then repeat steps 8 and 9.

jWhen you are finished, press [Esc].

Image Shape 68

a• To save the current shape of an image you have adjusted, select Save

Memory. You can save up to three image shapes in the memory.

sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Memory >Save Memory

• To reset the Point Correction settings to their original positions,

select Reset on the Point Correction screen.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

Loading Image Shape Setting from Memory

You can load the image shape settings you selected and saved to the

projector's memory and apply them to the current image.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

bHold down the [Num] button on the remote control, and then press

the numeric button (1, 2, or 3) that matches the number of the saved

setting.

aThe illustration above is only an example.

cWhen you have finished loading the settings, follow the on-screen

instructions.

Correcting Image Shape with Corner Markers

If you have installed corner markers on the projection surface, you can use the

projector's Auto Screen Adjustment setting to correct the shape of an image

automatically.

a• The Auto Screen Adjustment may not work properly depending on

the surface of the projected screen. You can perform the Auto Screen

Adjustment in the following situations:

• The screen surface is flat.

• The projection surface is not patterned or dirty and there are no

other obstructions on the screen surface.

• Before performing the Auto Screen Adjustment, set the screen type

setting. The adjustments reset when you change the Screen Type.

Auto Screen Adjustment can correct projected image distortion in these

conditions:

• Screen size is 110 inches or less

• Projection angle is within about 3° of squarely facing the projection surface

in all directions

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

Image Shape 69

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Installation menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Auto Screen Adjustment and press [Enter].

You see a guide screen.

eFollow the on-screen instructions to adjust the position of the projected

image so that the corner markers appear just inside the yellow area.

fPress [Enter].

The guide pattern appears and the projector starts adjusting the image

shape.

If there are any distortions in the shape of the projected images as a result of

the adjustments, correct the image shape using the Quick Corner correction.

Resizing the Image with the Buttons 70

You can resize the image using the Wide and Tele buttons.

a• For the best quality images, we recommend adjusting the installation

position of the projector to achieve the correct image size and shape.

• We recommend adjusting the image size at least 20 minutes after you

start projecting, because images are not stable right after turning on

the projector.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

bPress the Wide button on the projector's control panel to enlarge the

image size. Press the Tele button to reduce the image size.

aYou can also adjust the Digital Zoom setting in the projector's

Installation menu.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

Adjusting the Image Position 71

You can use the Image Shift feature to adjust the image position without

moving the projector.

a• This feature is not available if the Zoom option is set to the widest

setting.

• We recommend adjusting the image position at least 20 minutes after

you start projecting, because images are not stable right after turning

on the projector.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

bAdjust the image size using the Wide and Tele buttons.

After you adjust the image size, the Image Shift screen is displayed

automatically.

cUse the arrow buttons to adjust the image position.

dPress the [Esc] button to close the adjustment screen.

The adjustment screen disappears if no operation is performed after

approximately 10 seconds.

a• The Image Shift setting is retained even if the projector is turned off.

You need to re-adjust the position if you change the installation

location or angle of the projector.

• You can also adjust the Image Shift setting in the projector's

Installation menu.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

Selecting an Image Source 72

When multiple image sources are connected to the projector, such as a

computer and DVD player, you can switch from one image source to the

other.

aMake sure the connected image source you want to use is turned on.

bFor video image sources, insert a DVD or other video media and press

play.

cDo one of the following:

• Press the [Source Search] button on the control panel or remote

control until you see the image from the source you want.

aThis screen is displayed when no image signal is detected.

Check the cable connections between the projector and image

source.

Any devices connected to the control pad's HDMI ports are

displayed as the HDBaseT image source (EB-1485Fi only).

Selecting an Image Source 73

• Press the button for the source you want on the remote control. If

there is more than one port for that source, press the button again to

cycle through the sources.

AVideo, HDMI, and HDBaseT (EB-1485Fi only) sources (Video,

HDMI1, HDMI2, HDMI3 ports, and devices connected to the control

pad's HDMI ports)

BComputer port source (Computer1 and Computer2 ports)

CUSB port sources (USB-B port and external devices connected to the

USB-A ports)

DNetwork source (LAN and Screen Mirroring)

• Press the [Home] button on the control panel or remote control.

Then select the source you want to use from the screen displayed.

a• The display order of the input sources changes when the

projector detects an input signal. (The detected input source

appears in the upper left position.)

• A check mark appears on the image from the current input

source. You can check a preview of the current input image

for most sources as a thumbnail.

• If there are more than nine available input sources, your

desired source may appear on the next page. Select the right

arrow to move to the next page.

• Any devices connected to the control pad's HDMI ports are

displayed as the HDBaseT image source (EB-1485Fi only).

Image Aspect Ratio 74

The projector can display images in different width-to-height ratios called

aspect ratios. Normally, the input signal from your video source determines

the image's aspect ratio. However, for certain images you can change the

aspect ratio to fit your screen.

If you always want to use a particular aspect ratio for a certain video input

source, you can select it using the projector's Image menu.

gg Related Links

• "Changing the Image Aspect Ratio" p.74

• "Available Image Aspect Ratios" p.74

• "Projected Image Appearance with Each Aspect Mode" p.75

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

Changing the Image Aspect Ratio

You can change the aspect ratio of the displayed image.

a• Set the Screen Type setting in the projector's Installation menu

before changing the aspect ratio.

• This setting is available only when the Scale setting is turned off or

the Scale Mode setting is set to Full Display (EB-1485Fi only).

sImage >Scale >Scale Mode

aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

bPress the [Aspect] button on the remote control.

The shape and size of the displayed image changes, and the name of the

aspect ratio appears briefly on the screen.

cTo cycle through the available aspect ratios for your input signal, press

the [Aspect] button repeatedly.

aTo display images without black bars, set Resolution to Wide or

Normal in the projector’s Image menu according to the computer’s

resolution.

gg Related Links

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

Available Image Aspect Ratios

You can select the following image aspect ratios, depending on the selected

Screen Type setting and the input signal from your image source.

a• Note that using the aspect ratio function of the projector to reduce,

enlarge, or split the projected image for commercial purposes or for

public viewing may infringe upon the rights of the copyright holder

of that image based on copyright law.

Aspect mode Description

Auto Automatically sets the aspect ratio according to the

input signal and the Resolution setting.

Full Displays images using the full size of the projection

area, but does not maintain the aspect ratio.

Zoom Displays images using the full width of the projection

area and maintains the aspect ratio of the image. Areas

that exceed the edges of the projected screen are not

projected.

Image Aspect Ratio 75

Aspect mode Description

Native Displays images as is (aspect ratio and resolution are

maintained). Areas that exceed the edges of the

projected screen are not projected.

Projected Image Appearance with Each Aspect Mode

Black bands and cropped images may project in certain aspect ratios,

depending on the aspect ratio and resolution of your input signal. See the

following table to confirm the position of black bands and cropped images.

a• The image for Native varies depending on the input signal.

• If there are margins between the edge of the image and the projected

screen frame, you can adjust the position of the image using the

Screen Position setting in the projector's Installation menu.

sInstallation >Screen Type >Screen Position

Screen type setting: 16:10

Aspect mode Aspect ratio for input signals

16:10 16:9 4:3

Auto

Full

Zoom

Aspect mode Aspect ratio for input signals

16:10 16:9 4:3

Native

Screen type setting: 16:9

Aspect mode Aspect ratio for input signals

16:10 16:9 4:3

Auto

Full

Zoom

Native

Screen type setting: 4:3

Aspect mode Aspect ratio for input signals

16:10 16:9 4:3

Auto

Image Aspect Ratio 76

Aspect mode Aspect ratio for input signals

16:10 16:9 4:3

Full

Zoom

Native

Screen type setting: 16:6 (EB-1485Fi only)

Aspect mode Aspect ratio for input signals

16:10 16:9 4:3

Auto

Full

Aspect mode Aspect ratio for input signals

16:6 21:9

Auto

Full

Screen type setting: 21:9

Aspect mode Aspect ratio for input signals

16:10 16:9 4:3

Auto

Full

Zoom

Native

Image Aspect Ratio 77

Aspect mode Aspect ratio for input signals

16:6 21:9

Auto

Full

Zoom

Native

gg Related Links

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode) 78

The projector offers different color modes to provide optimum brightness,

contrast, and color for a variety of viewing environments and image types.

You can select the mode designed to match your image and environment, or

experiment with the available modes.

gg Related Links

• "Changing the Color Mode" p.78

• "Available Color Modes" p.78

• "Turning On Automatic Luminance Adjustment" p.78

Changing the Color Mode

You can change the projector's Color Mode using the remote control to

optimize the image for your viewing environment.

aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

bPress the [Color Mode] button on the remote control to change the

Color Mode.

The name of the Color Mode appears briefly on the screen and then

image appearance changes.

cTo cycle through all of the available color modes for your input signal,

press the [Color Mode] button repeatedly.

aYou can also set the Color Mode setting in the projector's Image

menu.

gg Related Links

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

Available Color Modes

You can set the projector to use these color modes, depending on the input

source you are using:

Color mode Description

Dynamic This is the brightest mode. Best for prioritizing

brightness.

Presentation Best for projecting vivid images.

Cinema Best for enjoying content such as movies.

sRGB Best for faithfully reproducing the color of the source

image.

Blackboard Best for projecting images directly on a green

chalkboard.

DICOM SIM Best for projecting X-ray photographs and other

medical images. This mode is for reference purposes

only and should not be used to make medical

diagnoses.

Multi-Projection (EB-

1485Fi)

Best for projecting from multiple projectors (reduces

the color tone difference between images).

Turning On Automatic Luminance Adjustment

You can turn on Dynamic Contrast to automatically optimize the image

luminance. This improves the image contrast based on the brightness of the

content you project.

Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode) 79

aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Image menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Dynamic Contrast and press [Enter].

eChoose one of the following options and press [Enter]:

•Normal for standard brightness adjustment.

•High Speed to adjust brightness as soon as the scene changes.

fPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

Adjusting the Image Color 80

You can fine-tune various aspects of how colors are displayed in your

projected images.

gg Related Links

• "Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness" p.80

• "Adjusting the Gamma" p.81

Adjusting the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness

You can adjust the Hue, Saturation, and Brightness settings for individual

image colors.

aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Image menu and press [Enter].

dSelect RGBCMY and press [Enter].

eSelect the color to adjust, and press [Enter].

Adjusting the Image Color 81

fDo the following as necessary for each setting:

• To adjust the overall hue of the color, bluish - greenish - reddish,

adjust the Hue setting.

• To adjust the overall vividness of the color, adjust the Saturation

setting.

• To adjust the overall color brightness of the color, adjust the

Brightness setting.

gPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

Adjusting the Gamma

You can correct differences in projected image colors that occur between

different image sources by adjusting the Gamma setting.

aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Image menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Gamma and press [Enter].

eSelect and adjust the correction value.

Adjusting the Image Color 82

When you select a smaller value, you can reduce the overall brightness

of the image to make the image sharper. When you select a larger value,

the dark areas of images become brighter, but the color saturation for

lighter areas may become weaker.

a• If you set the Color Mode setting to DICOM SIM in the

projector's Image menu, select the adjustment value according

to the projection size.

• If the projection size is 80 inches or less, select a small value.

• If the projection size is 80 inches or more, select a large

value.

• Medical images may not be reproduced correctly depending on

your settings and screen specifications.

fIf you want to make finer adjustments, select Customized and press

[Enter].

gPress the left or right arrow buttons to select the color tone you want to

adjust on the gamma adjustment graph. Then press the up or down

arrow button to adjust the value and press [Enter].

hPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

Adjusting the Brightness 83

You can adjust the brightness of your projector's light source.

aTurn on the projector and switch to the image source you want to use.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Operation menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Light Source Brightness Control and press [Enter].

eIf you want to maintain the brightness at a specific level, select the

Maintain Brightness setting and select On.

fIf you turn on Maintain Brightness, select the Maintain Brightness

Level setting and check the Estimated Remains information.

gIf you turn off Maintain Brightness, select the Light Source Mode

setting:

•Normal lets you set the brightness to the maximum level. This makes

the estimated life span of the light source approximately 20,000

hours.

•Quiet lets you set the brightness to 70% and reduces fan noise. This

makes the estimated life span of the light source approximately

20,000 hours.

•Extended lets you set the brightness to 70% and extends the life

expectancy of the light source. This makes the estimated life span of

the light source approximately 30,000 hours.

Adjusting the Brightness 84

•Custom lets you to select a custom brightness level between 70 to

100%.

hIf you set the Light Source Mode setting to Custom, select Brightness

Level and use the left and right arrow buttons to select the brightness.

iPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

aFor the best results in maintaining a constant brightness, set the Light

Source Calibration setting to Run Periodically in the projector's

Management menu.

gg Related Links

• "Constant Brightness Usage Hours" p.84

• "Light Source Life Span" p.85

• "Projector Specifications" p.282

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

Constant Brightness Usage Hours

If you turn on Maintain Brightness, the number of hours the projector can

maintain constant brightness is displayed as Estimated Remains.

Display level Estimated remaining hours

10000 or more hours

8000 to 9999 hours

6000 to 7999 hours

4000 to 5999 hours

Adjusting the Brightness 85

Display level Estimated remaining hours

2000 to 3999 hours

0 to 1999 hours

aThe number of hours displayed as Estimated Remains is just a guide.

Light Source Life Span

The estimated life span of the light source varies depending on the Brightness

Level setting and whether Maintain Brightness is on or off.

a• The light source life span varies depending on the environmental

conditions and usage.

• The hours listed here are an approximate and are not guaranteed.

• After 20,000 hours of use, you may need to replace parts in the

projector.

• If Maintain Brightness is turned on, and you have exceeded the

usage hours listed here, you may not be able to select a high

Maintain Brightness Level setting.

Maintain Brightness off

Brightness Level setting Time before the brightness of the light source is

reduced by half (approximate)

100% 20000 hours

90% 21000 hours

80% 24000 hours

70% 30000 hours

Maintain Brightness on

AMaintain brightness level

BTime the projector can maintain constant brightness (approximate)

Maintain Brightness Level

setting

Time the projector can maintain constant brightness

(approximate)

85% 6000 hours

80% 10000 hours

70% 19000 hours

Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons 86

The volume buttons control the projector's internal speaker system.

You can also control the volume of any external speakers you connected to

the projector.

You must adjust the volume separately for each connected input source.

aTurn on the projector and start a presentation.

bTo lower or raise the volume, press the [Volume] buttons on the

remote control as shown.

A volume gauge appears on the screen.

cTo set the volume to a specific level for an input source, select Volume

in the projector's Signal I/O menu.

Caution

Do not start a presentation at a high volume setting. Sudden loud noises may cause

hearing loss.

Always lower the volume before powering off, so that you can power on and then

gradually increase the volume.

gg Related Links

• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.207

Inverting the Audio Channels 87

You can invert the audio's left and right channels to match the projector

installation position.

aTurn on the projector and start a presentation.

bPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

cSelect the Signal I/O menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Inverse Audio and press [Enter].

eSelect On and press [Enter].

fPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

Using the Interactive Features

Follow the instructions in these sections to use the interactive features.

gg Related Links

• "Interactive Feature Modes" p.89

• "Preparing Before Using Interactive Features" p.91

• "Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)" p.96

• "Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode" p.102

• "Sharing Drawings" p.106

• "Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode)" p.112

• "Controlling a Document Camera" p.116

• "Selecting Network Device Display" p.117

• "Using the Interactive Features over a Network" p.119

• "Using Split Screen Projection" p.120

Interactive Feature Modes 89

You can perform the following operations with the interactive features.

• In whiteboard mode, you can use interactive pens or your finger to write on

the projected "whiteboard".

You do not need to use a computer or install any additional software to use

the built-in whiteboard drawing feature. This is useful in meetings as a

substitute for a whiteboard.

You can share the drawing contents you create with other projectors, save it

as a PDF or PNG file, and print it or send it as an email.

• In annotation mode, you can use interactive pens or your finger to add

notes to content projected from a computer, tablet, document camera, or

other source.

This helps you emphasize projected information or include additional notes

for more effective lessons or presentations.

You can capture your annotated pages, then save or print them.

Interactive Feature Modes 90

• In computer interactive mode, you can use interactive pens or your finger as

you would use a mouse. This allows you to navigate, select, and scroll

through content projected from your computer.

aYou can also use the Easy Interactive Tools software to provide

additional interactive features, such as saving and printing your

annotations. See the Easy Interactive Tools Operation Guide for

instructions.

gg Related Links

• "Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)" p.96

• "Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode" p.102

• "Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive

Mode)" p.112

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Preparing Before Using Interactive Features 91

This section provides safety instructions on setting up and using the

interactive pens or performing touch operations with your finger. Read these

instructions before using the interactive features.

gg Related Links

• "Safety Instructions for Interactive Features" p.91

• "Using the Interactive Pens" p.91

• "Using Interactive Touch Operations with Your Finger" p.93

Safety Instructions for Interactive Features

The interactive feature operates by infrared communication. Note the

following important points when using this feature.

• Make sure there is no strong light or sunlight shining on the interactive pen

receiver and the projection screen.

• If there is any dust stuck to the interactive pen receiver, it could interfere

with infrared communication and you may not be able to use the features

normally. Clean the receiver if it is dirty.

• Do not put paint or any stickers on the cover of the interactive pen receiver.

• Do not use an infrared remote control or infrared microphone in the same

room because the interactive pen may malfunction.

• Do not use devices that generate powerful noise, such as rotary devices or

transformers, near the projector. You may not be able to operate the

interactive features.

Using the Interactive Pens

Before using the interactive pens, set up the system and calibrate the pens. See

your projector's Installation Guide for instructions.

aYou need to calibrate the system again if you notice any discrepancy in

positioning after doing any of the following:

• Performing Geometry Correction

• Adjusting the image size

• Using the Image Shift feature

• Changing the projector position

Your projector comes with a blue pen and an orange pen, identified by the

color on the end of the pen. You can use either pen, or both at the same time

(one of each color).

Make sure the pen batteries are installed.

APen tip

BBattery indicator

CButton

DStrap attachment point

EBattery cover

Preparing Before Using Interactive Features 92

Hold the pen to turn it on.

When you are finished using the pen, leave the pen as it is far from the

projection screen.

Attention

• Do not use interactive pens with wet hands or in locations where the pens may

get wet. The interactive pens are not waterproof.

• Keep the projector and projection screen out of direct sunlight, or the interactive

features may not work.

a• Pens turns off automatically after 15 seconds when they are placed

on. Hold the pen to turn it back on.

• For best performance, hold the pen perpendicular to the board, as

shown below. Do not cover the black band near the tip of the pen.

You can do the following using the pen:

• Write or draw on the projection surface in whiteboard mode and

annotation mode.

• To select a projected item, such as an icon, tap the projection surface with

the pen tip.

• To draw on the projected screen, tap the projection surface with the pen

and drag it as necessary.

• To move the projected pointer, hover over the surface without touching

it.

• To switch the pen operation from a drawing tool to an eraser or other

functions selected in the projector's Interactive menu, press the button

on the side.

sInteractive >Pen Button Function

• Use the pen as a mouse in computer interactive mode.

• To left-click, tap the board with the pen tip.

Preparing Before Using Interactive Features 93

• To double-click, tap twice with the pen tip.

• To right-click, press the button on the side.

• To click and drag, tap and drag with the pen.

• To move the cursor, hover over the board without touching it.

a• If you do not want to use the hovering feature, you can turn it off

using the Pen Hovering setting in the projector's Pen/Touch menu.

• To make a long press of the pen act as a right-click, set the Pen

Tracking Mode setting to Mouse Mode and set the Press and Hold

setting to Right Click in the projector's Pen/Touch menu.

sPen/Touch >PC Interactivity >Pen Tracking Mode

sPen/Touch >PC Interactivity >Press and Hold

gg Related Links

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Using Interactive Touch Operations with Your Finger

You can use your finger to interact with the projected screen, just as you

would use an interactive pen. You can use either a pen or your finger, or use

both at the same time.

The projector recognizes up to six touch points in computer interactive mode.

When performing touch operations with your finger, you can use two fingers

in annotation and whiteboard modes.

Do the following before using your finger for touch operations:

• Install the Touch Unit

• Calibrate the system manually for the pen

• Perform angle adjustment for the Touch Unit

• Calibrate the system for touch operations

See your projector's Installation Guide for details on these operations.

The Touch Unit turns on and is ready for touch operation with your finger

when you turn on the projector and the indicator lights up in blue.

a• Check the following if the Touch Unit does not turn on.

• The projector is operating normally.

• When the Vertical Installation setting is set to Yes, make sure the

Projection setting is set to Front or Front/Upside Down in the

Installation menu.

• When the Vertical Installation setting is set to No, make sure the

Projection setting is set to Front/Upside Down or Rear/Upside

Down in the Installation menu.

• The Power setting is set to On in the Touch Unit menu.

sPen/Touch >Touch Unit >Power

• The Touch Unit is connected to the projector's TCH port with a

Touch Unit connection cable.

• Positioning discrepancies may occur depending on the angle of your

finger or the direction you point.

• Touch operations with your finger may not work properly with long

or artificial nails, or with your fingers wrapped in bandages.

• Touch operations may not be recognized correctly if your fingers or

the pens are too close together or crossed.

• If clothing or another part of your body comes close to or touches

the screen, the touch operations may work incorrectly.

• If you touch the screen with your free hand during touch operations,

the touch operations may work incorrectly.

You can perform the following touch operations with your finger:

Preparing Before Using Interactive Features 94

• Write or draw on the projection surface in annotation mode and

whiteboard mode.

• To select a projected item, such as an icon, tap the projection surface with

your finger.

• To draw on the projected screen for the first time after turning on the

projector, select a pen in the toolbar and tap the projection surface with

your finger. If you do not do this, your finger works as an eraser the first

time you use touch operations.

• To zoom in or out, touch an item using two fingers, and either move

your fingers away from each other (stretch to zoom in) or toward each

other (pinch to zoom out).

• To rotate the image, touch the image using two fingers and then rotate

your hand.

• Use your finger as a mouse in computer interactive mode.

• To left-click, tap the board with your finger.

• To double-click, tap twice with your finger.

• To click and drag, press on and drag an item with your finger.

a• If your device supports these functions, you can also do the

following:

• To zoom in or out, touch an item using two fingers, and either

move your fingers away from each other (stretch to zoom in) or

toward each other (pinch to zoom out).

• To rotate the image, touch the image using two fingers and then

rotate your hand.

• To scroll up or down the page, or move backward or forward in a

browser window, use gestures such as flicks.

• You can only use one tool with one finger at a time.

gg Related Links

• "Safety Instructions for Interactive Touch Operations" p.94

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Safety Instructions for Interactive Touch Operations

Touch operation with your finger is enabled by installing the Touch Unit with

a built-in high-power laser.

Preparing Before Using Interactive Features 95

The laser radiates from the laser diffusion ports on the bottom of the Touch

Unit:

Note the following important points when performing touch operations.

Warning

• Children using touch operations with their fingers should always be

accompanied by an adult.

• Never open any cases on the projector or the Touch Unit. Never attempt to

disassemble or modify the projector or the Touch Unit. Electrical voltages inside

the projector can cause severe injury.

• Do not allow the laser light emitted from the Touch Unit to pass through or be

reflected by any optical object, such as a magnifying glass or mirror. Continued

use of the Touch Unit may result in fire or accidents, and also cause injury.

• Unplug the projector from the outlet and refer all repairs to qualified service

personnel if any problems occur with the projector or the Touch Unit.

Continued use of the Touch Unit may result in fire or accidents, and can also

damage your eyes.

• Do not look at the laser light using an optical device (for example, eye lope,

magnifying glass, or microscope) within a distance of 70 mm from the laser

diffusion ports of the Touch Unit. This could damage your eyes.

Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode) 96

You can use your projector to project a whiteboard image onto a plain

surface. You can then use the interactive pens or your finger to draw letters

and shapes on the image as if it were a whiteboard. This is useful in locations

that do not have a whiteboard.

aIn whiteboard mode, you can also use both pens, or both pens and

your finger, at the same time.

gg Related Links

• "Safety Instructions for Whiteboard Mode" p.96

• "Starting Whiteboard Mode" p.96

Safety Instructions for Whiteboard Mode

Note the following important points when using this feature.

• All drawing data is cleared when the projector is turned off.

• Users are responsible for managing this data. Epson takes no responsibility

for direct or indirect damage caused by loss, damage, or disclosure of the

user's data or data for third parties through the use of this projector. Make

sure you understand these points before use.

Starting Whiteboard Mode

You can draw on the whiteboard screen using the whiteboard mode toolbar.

aTurn on the projector.

bPress the [Home] button.

cSelect Whiteboard.

Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode) 97

You see the whiteboard screen and toolbar.

a• You can move the toolbar to the right, left, top, or bottom of

the screen by dragging it.

• You can also start whiteboard mode by clicking on the

toolbar.

• Any drawings that you create in whiteboard mode are retained

if you change to annotation mode or other image sources.

dSelect the drawing tool you want to use from the toolbar displayed on

the bottom of the screen and draw on the projected screen using the

interactive pen or your finger.

gg Related Links

• "Whiteboard Mode Toolbar" p.97

• "Importing Images in Whiteboard Mode" p.99

• "Compatible File Types for Opening in Whiteboard Mode" p.101

Whiteboard Mode Toolbar

The whiteboard mode toolbar lets you draw and write on the projected

screen. The whiteboard mode toolbar is shown in the following illustration.

a• You can also use the mini toolbox by pressing the button on the side

of the pen anywhere in the drawing area. You can switch the type of

pen or eraser on the mini toolbox.

Home

Displays the Home screen.

A/V Mute

Turns the video and audio off. Tap the button again to turn the video and audio

back on.

Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode) 98

Other tools

Displays additional tools.

•Mail: Sends the projected screen by email. Set up the Mail settings in

the projector's Interactive menu first.

•Save: Saves the displayed screen. Set up the Save settings in the

projector's Interactive menu first.

•Print: Prints the projected screen. Set up the Print settings in the

projector's Interactive menu first.

•Timer: Counts the time up or down.

•Volume: Adjusts the volume of projector’s speaker system.

•Deliver screen: Shares the current screen using Epson iProjection

software.

•Participant List: Displays the user selection screen so you can project

from devices connected to the projector over a network.

•Help: Displays the help screen for the toolbar functions. Select Close to

close the help screen.

•Clear all drawing contents: Clears all the current drawing content and

images, and returns whiteboard mode to its default status.

Pen

Displays the available pen type, thickness, or shape.

Black/Red/Blue/Green/Yellow/White

(Yellow/Green/Aqua/Pink/Red/Blue for highlighter pen)

Switches the color for the drawings.

Eraser

Switches to an eraser. Select the size of the eraser.

Select

Selects drawn content or an inserted image so you can perform operations such

as moving the item or adjusting its size.

• Select the icon at the bottom right of the selected object or image to

perform operations. To paste the copied object or image, tap the screen, select

the icon, and select Paste.

• Drag the edge of the area to enlarge or reduce the object or image.

• Drag at the top of the area to rotate the selected object or image.

Undo

Undoes the previous operation

Redo

Cancels an undo operation and restores the previous status.

Clear screen

Clears all drawing from the displayed page.

Turn off Touch/Turn on Touch

Disables touch operations temporarily to prevent any unintended operation.

Also enables touch operations that you disabled.

Minimize

Hides the toolbar.

Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode) 99

a• You can display the following number and size of images on the

whiteboard screen.

• Up to 1920 × 1080 pixels × 2 files for one page

• Up to 20 pages

• Drawn objects are displayed at the front of the projected image.

• If objects or images are moved out of the projected screen, you may

not be able to select them.

Additional Buttons for Use in Whiteboard Mode

The buttons on the whiteboard mode lets you use whiteboard mode features.

Open

Opens a file and reads the data into a new page.

Add image

Imports an image file to the current page.

Background

Selects a background template.

Select to add user templates.

Zoom (Not available when you split the screen with whiteboard screen

and annotation screen)

Enlarges or reduces the projected image.

Delete page

Deletes the current page.

Displays the previous page.

Displays the next page.

New page

Adds a new page after the currently displayed page. You can add up to 20 pages.

gg Related Links

• "Home Screen" p.50

• "Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily" p.130

• "Sending Drawing Contents via Email" p.106

• "Saving Drawing Contents" p.108

• "Printing Drawing Contents" p.110

Importing Images in Whiteboard Mode

You can import images into the current page in whiteboard mode. You can

import files from a connected USB storage device or network folder, or you

can scan an image from a network scanner and import it.

Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode) 100

• To import images from a USB storage or a network folder, setup the Save

settings in the projector's Interactive menu first.

• To scan a paper document, make sure a supported printer with scanning

capabilities is connected to the projector and setup the Print settings in the

projector's Interactive menu first.

a• Printers with ESC/P-R commands are supported.

• Certain products, such as standalone scanners, cannot use this

feature. For a list of supported products, contact Epson for help.

• You cannot scan documents when the printer is in an unprintable

status such as when ink has run out.

When scanning using your product, you cannot use the following scanning

functions even if they are available:

• Using the scan button on your product.

• Scanning parts of the document.

• Scanning originals using an Automatic Document Feeder (ADF).

aIf you scan a paper document, load your original in the product.

bSelect the icon on the lower left of the whiteboard.

You see the Add image screen.

cSelect the following save settings on the Scan screen.

• From a USB storage or a network folder

Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode) 101

• From a scanner

ASelect the location of the image you want to import.

BSelect the file you want to import.

CSelect the paper size.

DSelect the orientation of the scanned document.

ESelect Color or Monochrome.

dSelect Open or Scan.

After importing or scanning, the image is projected as a current page in

whiteboard mode.

Compatible File Types for Opening in Whiteboard Mode

The following file types can be opened and read into a page in whiteboard

mode. Images larger than a page are reduced to fit.

Type File Type (Extension) Notes

Image .jpg The following cannot be read.

• Images with a resolution greater than

2048 × 2048

• Files with the extension ".jpeg"

• CMYK color mode formats

• Progressive formats

.webp Cannot read images with a resolution

greater than 2048 × 2048.

PDF .pdf You can open PDF files for version 1.7 or

earlier.

Specify the page number to open a PDF

file. If the file is password protected, enter

the password.

EWF2 .ewf2 Specify the page number to open an

EWF2 (Epson Whiteboard Format) file.

If the file is password protected, enter the

password.

Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode 102

Annotation mode lets you project from a computer, tablet, video device, or

other source and add notes to your projected content using the interactive

pens or your finger. You can use both pens at the same time. You can also use

both pens and your finger at the same time.

gg Related Links

• "Starting Annotation Mode" p.102

Starting Annotation Mode

To draw on the projected screen using annotation mode, you need to display

the annotation mode toolbar.

Before you begin, make sure the Drawing Function setting is set to On in the

projector's Interactive menu to enable the annotation mode.

aProject an image from a connected device.

You see the toolbar on the projected image, for example:

a• You can move the toolbar to the right, left, top, or bottom of

the screen by dragging it.

• You can switch to the whiteboard mode by clicking on the

toolbar.

bSelect the drawing tool you want to use from the toolbar displayed on

the bottom of the screen and draw on the projected screen using the

interactive pen or your finger.

gg Related Links

• "Annotation Mode Toolbar" p.103

Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode 103

Annotation Mode Toolbar

The annotation mode toolbar lets you draw and write on the projected screen.

The appearance of the toolbar varies depending on how you are projecting

and whether you are projecting a shared image.

aYou can also use the mini toolbox by right-clicking anywhere in the

drawing area. You can switch the type of pen or eraser on the mini

toolbox.

Home

Displays the Home screen.

A/V Mute

Turns the video and audio off. Tap the button again to

turn the video and audio back on.

Zoom

(Not available when you have split the screen into

halves or quarters)

Enlarges or reduces the projected image.

Capture

Captures the current screen and copies it to the

whiteboard.

•Full Screen captures the entire screen image.

•Select Area lets you select a portion of the image to

capture.

If you want to capture the Screen Mirroring image, set

Capture to Enabled in the projector's Network menu

first.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Network

Projection >Screen Mirroring >Capture

Whiteboard

(Not available when you have split the screen into

halves or quarters, or turned on the Scale setting)

Switches to Whiteboard Mode.

Split Screen

(Available only when you have split the screen into

halves or quarters)

Specifies the split screen settings.

Image Shift

(Available only when Screen Type is set to 16:6)

Specifies the horizontal position of the image inside the

ultra-wide display.

Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode 104

Other tools

Displays additional tools.

•Mail: Sends the projected screen by email. Set

up the Mail settings in the projector's Interactive

menu first.

•Save: Saves the displayed screen. Set up the

Save settings in the projector's Interactive menu first.

•Print: Prints the projected screen. Set up the

Print settings in the projector's Interactive menu

first.

•Timer: Counts the time up or down.

•Volume: Adjusts the volume of projector’s

speaker system.

•Deliver screen: Shares the current screen using

Epson iProjection software.

•Participant List: Displays the user selection

screen so you can project from devices connected to

the projector over a network.

•Help: Displays the help screen for the toolbar

functions. Select Close to close the help screen.

•Reset All: Clears all the current drawing content and

images, and returns annotation mode to its default

status.

Pen

Displays the available pen type, thickness, or shape.

Black/Red/Blue/Green/Ye

llow/White

(Yellow/Green/Aqua/Pin

k/Red/Blue for highlighter

pen)

Switches the color for the drawings.

Eraser

Switches to an eraser. Select the size of the eraser.

Select

Selects drawn content or an inserted image so you can

perform operations such as moving the item or

adjusting its size.

• Select the icon at the bottom right of the selected

object or image to perform operations. To paste the

copied object or image, tap the screen, select the

icon, and select Paste.

• Drag the edge of the area to enlarge or reduce the

object or image.

• Drag at the top of the area to rotate the selected

object or image.

Undo

Undoes the previous operation.

Redo

Cancels an undo operation and restores the previous

status.

Clear screen

Clears all drawing from the displayed page.

Draw on the Projected Image Using Annotation Mode 105

Turn off Touch/Turn on

Touch

Disables touch operations temporarily to prevent any

unintended operation. Also enables touch operations

that you disabled.

Stop Sharing

(Available only when projecting a shared image)

Stops screen sharing.

PC Interactivity

(Not available when projecting a shared image)

Switches to computer interactive mode. Set the PC

Interactivity setting to On to control the computer

using the interactive pen or your finger.

Minimize

Hides the toolbar.

a• Drawn objects are displayed at the front of the projected image.

• If objects or images are moved out of the projected screen, you may

not be able to select them.

gg Related Links

• "Whiteboard Screens (Whiteboard Mode)" p.96

• "Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive

Mode)" p.112

• "Home Screen" p.50

• "Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily" p.130

• "Zooming Images" p.132

• "Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously" p.122

• "Sending Drawing Contents via Email" p.106

• "Saving Drawing Contents" p.108

• "Printing Drawing Contents" p.110

Sharing Drawings 106

You can share the contents of drawings you create by saving or printing them,

or sending an email containing the content.

gg Related Links

• "Sending Drawing Contents via Email" p.106

• "Saving Drawing Contents" p.108

• "Printing Drawing Contents" p.110

Sending Drawing Contents via Email

You can attach an image of your drawings to an email and send it.

Set up the Mail settings in the projector's Interactive menu first. To be able to

search for an email address using a directory service, set up the Directory

settings in the projector's Interactive menu.

a• The address set for the sender in the projector's Mail menu is used as

the sender's address. If the sender's address has not been set, the

address set for the recipient as displayed as the sender.

• You cannot edit the text in the email.

aSelect the icon on the toolbar.

bSelect the icon.

You see the Mail screen.

cSelect the following save settings on the Mail screen.

• For Whiteboard mode

Sharing Drawings 107

• For Annotation mode

AEnter the email address for the recipient using the displayed keyboard.

The email address you set is stored until you clear the all drawings or

turn off the projector.

aWhen you set the Disallow Address Input setting

to On in the projector's Interactive menu, you

cannot enter the email address directly. Set

Disallow Address Input to Off first.

sInteractive >Mail >Disallow Address Input

BEnter the subject for the email.

CEnter the file name for the attachment.

DSelect whether to send all the whiteboard pages or only the current

projected image.

EFor PDFs or EWF2s, select the check box and enter a password to

encrypt the file.

Attention

• When you enter a password, it is displayed on the screen.

• When encrypting a file, make sure you do not forget the

password.

FSelect the format for the attached file (JPG, PDF, PNG, or EWF2).

GSpecify the email address for the recipient using the displayed E-mail

Address dialog box. You can specify up to 50 addresses.

You can set the address book using the directory service in the projector's

Interactive menu.

dSelect Send.

a• If there is a lot of content on the projected screen, it may take a

while to send the email.

• You may not be able to send the email depending on the

destination mail server settings. Contact your network

administrator about the mail server settings in advance.

gg Related Links

• "Creating an Address Book" p.107

• "Available Directory Service" p.108

Creating an Address Book

When sending e-mails of your drawings, you can choose e-mail addresses

from an address book. You can create the address book by loading a text file

of up to 999 addresses through the Web Control screen.

Joe Smith xxxxxx@xxxxx.com

Mary Jones-Smith xxxxxxx@xxxx.com

John Q. Public xxxx@xxxxxx.com

Sharing Drawings 108

aAddresses are displayed in the order they appear in the text file.

aCreate the text file containing the list of addresses you want to add to

the address book. The file must have the following characteristics:

• Tab-delimited

• Each line must contain a pair of strings separated by a tab: <name>

• Each line can contain up to 256 characters.

• Filename with a .txt extension

• Character code must be UTF-16 with BOM

An example of a text file:

bMake sure the projector is turned on.

cStart your Web browser on a computer connected to the network.

dSelect Interactive >Mail >Address Book Settings >Address Book

File and select the Choose File button.

eSelect the address book file and select Set.

The address book file is uploaded to the projector.

fTo delete the address book, select Interactive >Mail >Address Book

Settings >Delete Address Book and select Send.

Available Directory Service

The following directory service servers are supported.

Server type Directory service server

Operating system Windows Server 2012 R2

Windows Server 2016

Port Variable (default is 389)

Authentication Anonymous (no authentication)

Simple

Digest-MD5

SMTP

Encryption SASL layer encryption

(SSL/TLS is not supported)

Notes for search

• Up to 200 matched addresses are listed.

• You can search addresses using alphanumeric characters.

Saving Drawing Contents

You can save the content you created on the projected screen to a file.

Caution

If you are using a multi-card reader or USB hub, operations may not be performed

correctly. For best results, connect directly to the projector or the control pad.

aYou may not be able to use USB storage devices that incorporate

security functions.

aSelect the icon on the toolbar.

Sharing Drawings 109

bSelect the icon.

You see the Save screen.

cSelect the following save settings on the Save screen.

• For Whiteboard mode

• For Annotation mode

ASelect the destination where you want to save the file.

• Select USB or Network to save to a connected USB storage device or

network folder.

• Select Computer to temporarily save the file on the projector and make

it available for copying from the computer. After the file is copied, it is

erased. You cannot save the file to a computer when the input source is

USB Display or HDBaseT, or when you have split the screen into

halves or quarters.

BFor PDFs or EWF2s, select the check box and enter a password to

encrypt the file.

Attention

• When you enter a password, it is displayed on the screen.

• When encrypting a file, make sure you do not forget the

password.

CSelect whether to save all the whiteboard pages or only the current

projected image.

Sharing Drawings 110

DSelect the save format (JPG, PDF, PNG, or EWF2).

EEnter a file name.

FFor USB or Network, select the target folder using the displayed Open

dialog box.

dSelect Save (Next for Computer).

aWhen Computer is selected as the file save destination, the drawing

content is temporarily saved on the projector and the instruction dialog

box appears. Follow the on-screen instructions to save the data on your

computer.

gg Related Links

• "Available File Format in Whiteboard Mode" p.110

Available File Format in Whiteboard Mode

You can save in the following file formats:

• PNG (Resolution: 1920 × 1080)

• JPG (Resolution: 1920 × 1080)

• PDF (set a password if necessary)

• EWF2 (set a password if necessary)

When saving the file as editable, select the EWF2 format. The EWF2 format is

supported with the interactive projectors and Easy Interactive Tools.

Printing Drawing Contents

You can print your pages directly from the projector to a supported printer

(USB or networked).

Setup the Print settings in the projector's Interactive menu first.

aSelect the icon on the toolbar.

bSelect the icon.

You see the Print screen.

cSelect the following save settings on the Print screen.

• For Whiteboard mode

Sharing Drawings 111

• For Annotation mode

ASet the number of copies. You can specify up to 20 sheets.

BSelect whether to print all the whiteboard pages or only the current

projected image.

CSet the print paper size.

DSet the number of pages per sheet.

EIf your printer supports double-sided printing, select whether to print on

both sides.

FSet the print color.

dSelect Print.

gg Related Links

• "Available Printer Control Commands in Whiteboard Mode" p.111

Available Printer Control Commands in Whiteboard Mode

The following printer* control commands are supported.

Control commands Connection method

ESC/P-R USB or over a network

PCL6 Over a network

* Not all printers are supported. For more details on supported models,

contact Epson for help.

Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode) 112

When the projector is connected to a computer with a USB cable, you can

operate the computer from the projected screen using the interactive pens or

your finger, just as you would use with a mouse. You can navigate, select, and

interact with your computer programs from the projected screen.

a• When you use multiple displays with Windows 7 or later and use

computer interactive mode on the secondary display, make the

following settings:

• Set the Pen Tracking Mode setting to Pen Mode in the projector's

Pen/Touch menu.

sPen/Touch >PC Interactivity >Pen Tracking Mode

• Go to Control Panel >Hardware and Sound >Table PC Settings

>Setup to launch the setup program and configure the interactive

features.

If you set up a third display, you cannot use interactive features with

that display.

You cannot write or draw across multiple screens.

• To use computer interactive mode over a network, you need to

install Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac).

gg Related Links

• "Computer Interactive Mode System Requirements" p.112

• "Using Computer Interactive Mode" p.113

• "Adjusting the Pen Operation Area" p.113

• "Installing Easy Interactive Driver on Mac" p.115

Computer Interactive Mode System Requirements

Your computer must use one of the following operating systems to use the

computer interactive mode.

Windows

• Windows 7 Service Pack 1

• Ultimate (32- and 64-bit)

• Enterprise (32- and 64-bit)

• Professional (32- and 64-bit)

• Home Premium (32- and 64-bit)

• Windows 8.1

• Windows 8.1 (32- and 64-bit)

• Windows 8.1 Pro (32- and 64-bit)

• Windows 8.1 Enterprise (32- and 64-bit)

• Windows 10

• Windows 10 Home (32- and 64-bit)

• Windows 10 Pro (32- and 64-bit)

Mac

• OS X 10.11.x

macOS

• 10.12.x

• 10.13.x

• 10.14.x

Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode) 113

Ubuntu

• 16.04 LTS

• 18.04 LTS

• 19.04

Using Computer Interactive Mode

You can control your computer programs from the projected screen using

computer interactive mode.

aIf you are using Mac, install the Easy Interactive Driver on your

computer the first time you use the interactive features.

bConnect the projector to your computer using a USB cable.

a• If you want to use computer interactive mode with USB

Display, turn on the USB Display setting in the projector's

Signal I/O menu. When projecting using USB Display,

response time may be slower.

• When using the control pad, you need to connect the

projector, the control pad, and your computer using USB

cables.

• When using computer interactive mode over a network, you

do not need a USB cable.

cTurn on the projector.

dProject your computer screen.

eSelect the Pen Tracking Mode setting in the projector's Pen/Touch

menu that matches your computer operating system.

sPen/Touch >PC Interactivity >Pen Tracking Mode

• Windows and Mac: Select Pen Mode.

• Ubuntu: Select Mouse Mode.

aUsing two interactive pens at the same time may cause

interference in some applications. Move the unused interactive

pen away from the projection screen.

fMake sure you have calibrated the first time you use your projector.

gHold an interactive pen close to the projected screen, or touch the

projected screen with your finger.

hMake sure that the PC Interactivity is turned on in the toolbar. If not,

select the button to enable feature.

You can now operate the computer using the interactive pen or your finger.

You can also operate the following:

• The Tablet PC input panel in Windows 7.

• Ink Tools for annotation in Microsoft Office applications.

Adjusting the Pen Operation Area

The pen operation area is normally adjusted automatically if you connect a

different computer or adjust the computer's resolution. If you notice that the

pen position is incorrect when you operate your computer from the projected

screen (computer interactive mode), you can adjust the pen area manually.

aManual adjustment is not available when projecting from a LAN

source.

aSwitch to computer interactive mode, if necessary.

Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode) 114

bPress the [Menu] button, select the Pen/Touch menu, and then press

[Enter]. cSelect the PC Interactivity setting and press [Enter].

dMake sure you turn off the Auto Adjust Pen Area setting and select

Manual Adj. Pen Area and press the [Enter] button.

eSelect Yes and press the [Enter] button.

Control Computer Features from a Projected Screen (Computer Interactive Mode) 115

The mouse pointer moves toward the top left corner.

fWhen the mouse pointer stops at the top left corner of the image, touch

the tip of the pointer with the pen.

The mouse pointer moves toward the bottom right corner.

gWhen the mouse pointer stops at the bottom right corner of the image,

touch the tip of the pointer with the pen.

Installing Easy Interactive Driver on Mac

Install Easy Interactive Driver on your computer to use computer interactive

mode.

aTurn on your computer.

bDownload the software from the Epson Web site.

cFollow the on-screen instructions to install the software.

dRestart your computer.

Controlling a Document Camera 116

When you connect an Epson document camera, you can adjust the images as

necessary and save them as an image or movie file, depending on the

document camera model. See your document camera manual for details.

aConnect an Epson document camera to the projector.

You see the document camera control screen.

bSelect the following operations as necessary on the document camera

control screen.

AAutomatically focuses the image.

BFreezes the image temporarily.

CEnlarges the image.

DRotates the image 180°.

ESaves the currently displayed image and drawings as a still image.

FRecords the image.

GSwitches to the SD Card Viewer.

gg Related Links

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Selecting Network Device Display 117

If you have connected devices to the projector via a network, you can select to

project an image from those devices.

You can select the image source from computers that are running Epson

iProjection (Windows/Mac), and smartphones or tablets that are running

Epson iProjection (iOS/Android).

aYou can select any connected network device for projection, even if the

user connected using the Epson iProjection software with the

moderator feature enabled. See the Epson iProjection Operation Guide

(Windows/Mac) for details about the moderator feature.

aSelect the icon on the toolbar, and then select Participant List.

The user selection screen is displayed.

bSelect the user name for the device you want to project from.

ADisplays the user names for network devices connected to the projector.

When displaying thumbnails, each device screen is displayed as a

thumbnail.

The icon is shown next to the user name of the currently projected

device.

BSwitches the display for the user selection screen between thumbnails or

icons.

CRefreshes the user selection screen.

When an additional user connects to the projector via a network, select

this button to update the user list.

DClick to move to the previous page or the next page.

ECloses the user selection screen and returns to the previous screen.

a• On the user selection screen, you can use two pens or one

finger at a time.

Selecting Network Device Display 118

You see the selected user's screen image.

When you change the user, repeat these steps.

a• You cannot access the Participant List screen when connecting to

multiple projectors by using Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) and

projecting the same image (mirroring).

• If pen operations or touch operations do not work on the user

selection screen, you can return to the previous screen by pressing

the [Esc] button on the remote control or the control panel.

gg Related Links

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Using the Interactive Features over a Network 119

You can use your projector in computer interactive mode over a network.

If you want to annotate when using computer interactive mode over a

network, you need to use Easy Interactive Tools (or another annotation

program). Easy Interactive Tools allows you to use various drawing tools,

treat the drawing area as a page, and save your drawings as a file for a later

use. You can download the software from the Epson website.

Use Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) to setup your projector on a computer

network and use computer interactive mode over the network.

Select Use Interactive Pen on the General settings tab and Transfer layered

window on the Adjust performance tab.

See the Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for instructions.

a• Number of pens or fingers you can use at the same time is as follows:

• Windows: two pens and six fingers

• Mac: one pen or one finger

• The response may be slower over the network.

• You can connect up to four projectors at one time using Epson

iProjection. When connected to multiple projectors, computer

interactive mode functions for any projector. Operations performed

on one projector are reflected in other projectors.

gg Related Links

• "Precautions when Connecting to a Projector on a Different Subnet" p.119

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Precautions when Connecting to a Projector on a

Different Subnet

Follow these precautions when you connect to a projector on a different

subnet using Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) and use interactive features:

• Search for the projector on the network by specifying the projector's IP

address. You cannot search for it by specifying the projector name.

• Make sure that you get an echo reply back from the network projector when

sending an echo request by the ping command. When the Internet Control

Message Protocol (ICMP) option is disabled on the router, you can connect

to the projector at remote locations even if you cannot get the echo reply

back.

• Make sure the following ports are opened.

Port Protocol Usage Communication

3620 TCP/UDP For connection and

control

two-way

3621 TCP For transferring images two-way

3629 TCP For controlling projector two-way

• Make sure that the MAC address filtering and application filtering options

are configured properly on the router.

• When bandwidth management is applied for communications between

locations, and Epson iProjection goes over the controlled bandwidth, you

may not be able to connect to the projector at remote locations.

aEpson does not guarantee the connection to the projector on a

different subnet using Epson iProjection even if you meet the above

requirements. When considering the implementation, be sure to test

the connection in your network environment.

Using Split Screen Projection 120

When you project images in PC Free Annotation mode or PC Interactive

mode, you can split the screen so you can also display the whiteboard screen.

Follow the steps below to control split screen projection using the toolbar.

aThis feature is not available when you have split the screen into halves

or quarters, or turned on the Scale setting.

aProject an image.

bSelect on the toolbar.

You see the whiteboard screen on the left half of the screen. The

currently selected input source moves to the right of the screen.

cTo enlarge one image while reducing the other image, drag the bar in

the center to the left or right.

aTo enlarge one image to fit the entire screen, drag the bar to the

edge of the screen.

dTo swap the projected images from left to right, select in the center

bar.

Adjusting Projector Features

Follow the instructions in these sections to use your projector's adjustment features.

gg Related Links

• "Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously" p.122

• "Projecting a PC Free Presentation" p.125

• "Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily" p.130

• "Stopping Video Action Temporarily" p.131

• "Zooming Images" p.132

• "Saving a User's Logo Image" p.133

• "Saving a User Pattern" p.135

• "Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings" p.137

• "Using Multiple Projectors" p.138

• "Projector Security Features" p.152

Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously 122

You can use the split screen feature to simultaneously project two or four

images from different image sources.

a• While using the split screen feature, other projector features may not

be available and some settings may be automatically applied to all

images.

• You cannot perform split screen projection when the Connect

ELPCB02 setting is set to On in the projector's Installation menu.

aPress the [Split] button on the remote control.

bSelect 2 Screens or 4 Screens.

When splitting screen into halves, the currently selected input source

moves to the left of the screen.

When you have split screen into quarters previously, the input sources

of the previous split screen projection are selected and are projected at

the same position.

cPress the [Menu] button.

Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously 123

dWhen splitting screen into halves, do the following as necessary:

ASelect the input source.

aYou can only select input sources that can be

combined.

BSelect the screen from which you want to hear audio.

CSelect the screen from which you want to operate the computer using the

interactive pens or your finger.

DSelect the screen size.

eWhen splitting screen into quarters, do the following as necessary:

ASelect the input source.

aYou can only select input sources that can be

combined.

BSelect the screen from which you want to hear audio.

CSelect the screen from which you want to operate the computer using the

interactive pens or your finger.

fSelect Execute and press [Enter].

gTo exit the split screen feature, press [Split] or [Esc].

Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously 124

gg Related Links

• "Unsupported Input Source Combinations for Split Screen Projection" p.124

• "Split Screen Projection Restrictions" p.124

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

Unsupported Input Source Combinations for Split

Screen Projection

These input source combinations cannot be projected simultaneously.

• Computer1, Computer2, and Video

• HDMI2, HDMI3, and HDBaseT (EB-1485Fi only)

• USB1, USB2, USB Display, and LAN

Split Screen Projection Restrictions

Operating restrictions

The following operations cannot be performed during split screen projection.

• Setting the projector's menu

• E-Zoom

• Switching the aspect mode (the aspect mode is set to Auto)

• Operations using the [User] button on the remote control, other than

displaying the network information on the projected surface.

• Dynamic Contrast

• Displaying the network information on the projected surface by a method

other than pressing the [User] button.

• Displaying the Screen Mirroring information bar

Image restrictions

Even if you set No-signal Screen to Logo in the projector's Display menu, the

blue screen appears when no image signal is being input.

gg Related Links

• "Image Aspect Ratio" p.74

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

• "Projector Display Settings - Display Menu" p.211

• "Zooming Images" p.132

• "Turning On Automatic Luminance Adjustment" p.78

Projecting a PC Free Presentation 125

You can use your projector's PC Free feature whenever you connect a USB

device that contains compatible presentation files. This lets you quickly and

easily display a presentation and control it using the projector's remote

control.

gg Related Links

• "Supported PC Free File Types" p.125

• "Precautions on PC Free Projection" p.125

• "Starting a PC Free Slide Show" p.126

• "Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation" p.127

• "PC Free Display Options" p.128

Supported PC Free File Types

You can project these types of files using the projector's PC Free feature.

a• For best results, place your files on media that is formatted in

FAT16/32.

• If you have trouble projecting from media formatted for non-

Windows file systems, try formatting the media for Windows

instead.

File contents File type

(extension)

Details

Image .jpg Make sure the file is not:

• CMYK format

• Progressive format

• Highly compressed

• Above 8192 × 8192 resolution

.bmp Make sure the file is not:

• Above 1280 × 800 resolution

.gif Make sure the file is not:

• Above 1280 × 800 resolution

• Animated

• Interlaced

.webp Make sure the file is not:

• Above 1920 × 1080 resolution

• Interlaced

Movie .avi

(Motion

JPEG)

Supports only AVI 1.0.

Make sure the file is not:

• Saved with an audio codec other than PCM or

ADPCM

• Above 1280 × 720 resolution

• Larger than 2 GB

Precautions on PC Free Projection

Note the following precautions when using PC Free features.

• You cannot use a USB key for PC Free features.

• Do not disconnect the USB storage device while it is being accessed;

otherwise, PC Free may not operate correctly.

• You may not be able to use the security features on certain USB storage

devices with PC Free features.

Projecting a PC Free Presentation 126

• When connecting a USB device that includes an AC adapter, connect the

AC adapter to an electrical outlet when you use the device with your

projector.

• Some commercially available USB card readers may not be compatible with

the projector.

• The projector can recognize up to 5 cards inserted into the connected card

reader at one time.

• You cannot correct keystone distortion while projecting in PC Free, so

correct the image shape before you begin your presentation.

• You can use the following functions while projecting in PC Free.

• Freeze

• A/V Mute

• E-Zoom

gg Related Links

• "Stopping Video Action Temporarily" p.131

• "Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily" p.130

• "Zooming Images" p.132

Starting a PC Free Slide Show

After connecting a USB device to the projector, you can switch to the USB

input source and start your slide show.

a• You can change the PC Free operation options or add special effects

by highlighting Option at the bottom of the screen and pressing

[Enter].

• In computer interactive mode, you can operate your slide show using

the interactive pen or your finger instead of the remote control.

aPress the [USB] button on the remote control until the PC Free file list

screen appears.

a• If the Select Drive screen is displayed, press the arrow buttons

to select the drive and press [Enter].

• To display images on the other USB drive, highlight Select

Drive at the top of the file list screen and press [Enter].

bDo one of the following to locate your files:

• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press

the arrow buttons to highlight the folder and press [Enter].

• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to

Top and press [Enter].

• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next Page or Previous

Page and press [Enter], or press the [Page] up or down buttons on

the remote control.

cDo one of the following:

• To display an individual image, press the arrow buttons to highlight

the image and press [Enter]. (Press the [Esc] button to return to the

file list screen.)

Projecting a PC Free Presentation 127

• To display a slide show of all the images in a folder, press the arrow

buttons to highlight the Slideshow option at the bottom of the screen

and press [Enter].

a• You can change the image switching time by highlighting

Option at the bottom of the screen and pressing [Enter].

• If any file names are longer than the display area or include

unsupported symbols, the file names may be shortened or

changed only on the screen display.

dWhile projecting, use the following commands to control the display:

• To rotate a displayed image, press the up or down arrow button.

You can also rotate the image by flicking it using the interactive pen

or your finger.

• To move to the next or previous image, press the left or right arrow

button.

You can also move forward or backward by flicking the image using

the interactive pen or your finger.

eTo stop the display, follow the on-screen instructions or press the [Esc]

button.

You return to the file list screen.

fTurn off the USB device, if necessary, and then disconnect the device

from the projector.

gg Related Links

• "PC Free Display Options" p.128

• "Connecting to a USB Device" p.38

Starting a PC Free Movie Presentation

After connecting a USB device to the projector, you can switch to the USB

input source and start your movie.

a• You can change the PC Free operation options by highlighting

Option at the bottom of the screen and pressing [Enter].

aPress the [USB] button on the remote control until the PC Free file list

screen appears.

Projecting a PC Free Presentation 128

a• If the Select Drive screen is displayed, press the arrow buttons

to select the drive and press [Enter].

• To display images on the other USB drive, highlight Select

Drive at the top of the file list screen and press [Enter].

bDo one of the following to locate your files:

• If you need to display files inside a subfolder on your device, press

the arrow buttons to highlight the folder and press [Enter].

• To move back up a folder level on your device, highlight Back to

Top and press [Enter].

• To view additional files in a folder, highlight Next Page or Previous

Page and press [Enter], or press the [Page] up or down buttons on

the remote control.

cTo play back a movie, press the arrow buttons to highlight the file and

press [Enter].

a• If any file names are longer than the display area or include

unsupported symbols, the file names may be shortened or

changed only on the screen display.

• If you want to play back all the movies in a folder in sequence,

select the Slideshow option at the bottom of the screen.

dTo stop movie playback, press the [Esc] button, highlight Exit, and

press [Enter].

You return to the file list screen.

eTurn off the USB device, if necessary, and then disconnect the device

from the projector.

gg Related Links

• "PC Free Display Options" p.128

• "Connecting to a USB Device" p.38

PC Free Display Options

You can select these display options when using PC Free. To access this

screen, highlight Option at the bottom of the PC Free file list screen and press

[Enter].

Setting Options Description

Display Order Name Order Displays files in name order

Date Order Displays files in date order

Sort Order In Ascending Sorts files in first-to-last order

In Descending Sorts files in last-to-first order

Continuous Play On Displays a slide show continuously

Off Displays a slide show once

Screen Switching

Time

No Does not display the next file

automatically

1 Second to 60 Seconds Displays files for the selected time

and switches to the next file

automatically; high resolution images

may switch at a slightly slower rate

Projecting a PC Free Presentation 129

Setting Options Description

Effect No No effect

Wipe Transitions between images using a

wipe effect

Dissolve Transitions between images using a

dissolve effect

Random Transitions between images using a

random variety of effects

Shutting Off the Image and Sound Temporarily 130

You can temporarily turn off the projected image and sound if you want to

redirect your audience's attention during a presentation. Any sound or video

action continues to run, however, so you cannot resume projection at the

point that you stopped it.

aPress the [A/V Mute] button on the remote control to temporarily stop

projection and mute any sound.

bTo turn the image and sound back on, press [A/V Mute] again.

a• You can also stop projection using the interactive toolbar.

• The projector's power automatically turns off 30 minutes after A/V

Mute is enabled. You can disable this feature.

sOperation >A/V Mute Timer

gg Related Links

• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.213

• "Whiteboard Mode Toolbar" p.97

• "Annotation Mode Toolbar" p.103

Stopping Video Action Temporarily 131

You can temporarily stop the action in a video or computer presentation and

keep the current image on the screen. Any sound or video action continues to

run, however, so you cannot resume projection at the point that you stopped

it.

aPress the [Freeze] button on the remote control to stop the video

action.

bTo restart the video action in progress, press [Freeze] again.

Zooming Images 132

You can draw attention to parts of a presentation by zooming into a portion

of the image and enlarging it on the screen.

aThis feature is unavailable if the Scale setting in the projector's Signal

I/O menu is enabled (EB-1485Fi only).

aPress the [E-Zoom] + button on the remote control.

You see a crosshair on the screen indicating the center of the zoom

area.

bUse the following buttons on the remote control to adjust the zoomed

image:

• Use the arrow buttons to position the crosshair in the image area you

want to zoom into. To move the crosshair diagonally, press any pair

of adjacent arrow buttons at the same time.

• Press the [E-Zoom] + button repeatedly to zoom into the image area.

Press and hold the [E-Zoom] + button to zoom in more quickly.

• To pan around the zoomed image area, use the arrow buttons.

• To zoom out of the image, press the [E-Zoom] – button.

• To return to the original image size, press [Esc].

The enlarged image is projected and the enlargement ratio is displayed

on the screen.

You can enlarge the selected area to between one to four times in 25

incremental steps.

When projecting images from an Epson document camera using a USB

connection, you can enlarge the selected area from one to eight times

its size in 57 incremental steps.

gg Related Links

• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.207

Saving a User's Logo Image 133

You can save an image on the projector and display it whenever the projector

turns on. You can also display the image when the projector is not receiving

an input signal. This image is called the user's logo screen.

You can select a photo, graphic, or company logo as the user's logo, which is

useful in identifying the projector's owner to help deter theft. You can prevent

changes to the user's logo by setting up password protection.

a• If you turned on Menu Protection for the User's Logo setting, set it

to Off before performing the steps here to save the user's logo.

• When you copy the menu settings from one projector to another

using the batch setup feature, user's logo is also copied. Do not

multiple projectors as a user's logo.

• You cannot save content that is protected by HDCP.

aDisplay the image you want to project as the user's logo.

bPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press

[Enter].

cSelect User's Logo >Start Setting and press [Enter].

You see a prompt asking if you want to use the displayed image as a

user's logo.

aAdjustments such as Geometry Correction, E-Zoom, Aspect,

Scale (EB-1485Fi only), or Screen Type are temporarily canceled

when you select User's Logo.

dSelect Yes and press [Enter].

aDepending on the current image signal, the screen size may

change to match the resolution of the image signal.

Saving a User's Logo Image 134

eCheck the displayed image, and then select Yes to save it as the user's

logo.

The user's logo is overwritten and a completion message is displayed.

fPress [Esc] to exit the message screen.

gSelect the Display menu and press [Enter].

hSelect when you want to display the User's Logo screen:

• To display it whenever there is no input signal, select No-signal

Screen and set it to Logo.

• To display it whenever you turn the projector on, select Startup

Screen and set it to On.

To prevent changes to the User's Logo settings, turn on Menu Protection for

the User's Logo setting and set the password.

gg Related Links

• "Selecting Password Security Types" p.153

Saving a User Pattern 135

There are four types of patterns pre-registered in the projector, such as ruled

lines and grid patterns. You can project these patterns to aid in presentations

using the Pattern Display settings.

You can also save the image that is currently being projected as a User

Pattern.

aOnce you save a User Pattern, the pattern cannot be returned to the

factory default.

aProject the image you want to save as the User Pattern.

bPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press

[Enter].

cSelect User Pattern and press [Enter].

You see a prompt asking if you want to use the displayed image as a

User Pattern.

aAdjustments such as Keystone, E-Zoom, Aspect, Adjust Zoom,

or Image Shift are temporarily cancelled when you select User

Pattern.

dSelect Yes and press [Enter].

You see a prompt asking if you want to save the image as the User

Pattern.

eSelect Yes and press [Enter].

You see a completion message.

fSelect the Display menu and press [Enter].

gSelect Pattern Type and set it to User Pattern.

hSelect Pattern Display and press [Enter].

Saving a User Pattern 136

The saved image is projected.

Saving Settings to Memory and Using Saved Settings 137

You can save customized settings and then select the saved settings whenever

you want to use them.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

bPress the [Menu] button, select the Memory menu, and press [Enter].

cSelect one of the following options:

•Save Memory lets you save your current settings to memory (10

memories with different names are available).

a• You can save the following settings:

•Image menu settings for each color mode

•Video Range and Overscan in the Signal I/O menu

•Light Source Mode and Brightness Level in the

Operation menu

•Color Matching in the Multi-Projection menu (EB-

1485Fi)

•Color Matching in the Management menu (EB-1480Fi)

• A memory name that has already been used is indicated by a

blue mark. Saving over a previously saved memory

overwrites the settings with your current settings.

•Load Memory lets you overwrite your current settings with saved

settings.

•Rename Memory lets you rename a saved memory.

•Erase Memory lets you erase the selected memory settings.

dPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

a• The saved Color Mode is displayed on the right of the memory

name.

• To delete all saved memories, select Reset Memory.

gg Related Links

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.207

• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.213

• "Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu" p.233

Using Multiple Projectors 138

You can combine the projected images from two or more projectors to create

one unified image area.

aBefore starting projection, make sure you set the Color Mode setting to

Multi-Projection in the projector's Image menu for all of the

projectors (EB-1485Fi only).

For best results, select settings and adjustments for multiple projector images

in this order:

• Setting the Projector ID

• Adjusting Color Uniformity

• Blending the Image Edges

• Matching the Image Colors

• Adjusting the Black Level

• Adjusting RGBCMY

• Scaling an Image

aWe recommend adjusting the image at least 20 minutes after you start

projecting, because images are not stable right after turning on the

projector.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control" p.138

• "Adjusting Color Uniformity" p.140

• "Blending the Image Edges" p.142

• "Matching the Image Colors" p.144

• "Adjusting the Black Level" p.145

• "Adjusting RGBCMY" p.148

• "Scaling an Image" p.149

Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector

Control

When lining up multiple projectors to project images, you can correct the

brightness and color tone of each projector's image so that the images match

closely.

You can set a unique projector ID for each projector to operate them

individually using a remote control, and then correct the brightness and color

for each projector.

a• In some cases the brightness and color tone may not match

completely even after correction.

• If brightness and color tone differences become more noticeable over

time, repeat the adjustments.

gg Related Links

• "Setting the Projector ID" p.138

• "Selecting the Projector You want to Operate" p.139

Setting the Projector ID

To control multiple projectors from a remote control, give each projector a

unique ID.

Using Multiple Projectors 139

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press

[Enter].

bSelect Projector ID and press [Enter].

cUse the arrow buttons to select the identification number you want to

use for the projector. Then press [Enter].

dPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

eRepeat these steps for all the other projectors you want to operate from

one remote control.

Selecting the Projector You want to Operate

After setting the projector's ID, select the ID for the projector you want to

operate using the remote control.

Using Multiple Projectors 140

aAim the remote control at the target projector and press the [ID]

button.

The current Projector ID is displayed on the projected screen. It

disappears after about 3 seconds.

bWhile holding the [ID] button, press the number button that matches

the ID of the projector you want to operate.

The projector you want to operate is selected.

a• When you select [0/All] on the remote control, you can

operate all projectors regardless the Projector ID setting.

• When you set the Projector ID setting to Off, you can operate

the projector using the remote control whichever ID you select

on the remote control.

• The projector ID setting is saved in the remote control. Even if

the remote control batteries are removed to replace them and

so on, the saved ID setting is retained. However, if the batteries

are left out of the remote control for an extended period, the

ID returns to its default setting (0/All).

• When you use multiple remote controls at the same time, you

may not be able to operate projectors as intended due to

infrared interference.

Adjusting Color Uniformity

If the color tone of the image projected from multiple projectors is uneven,

you can adjust the color tone balance for each projector.

aThe color tone may not be uniform even after adjusting the color

uniformity.

Using Multiple Projectors 141

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press

[Enter]. bSelect Color Uniformity and press [Enter].

cSelect Color Uniformity again and press [Enter].

dSelect On and press [Enter]. Then press [Esc].

eSelect Adjustment Level and press [Enter].

fSelect the first adjustment level you want to adjust and press [Esc].

Using Multiple Projectors 142

aThere are eight adjustment levels, from white to gray to black.

You can adjust each level individually.

gSelect Start Adjustments and press [Enter].

hSelect the area of the image you want to adjust and press [Enter].

aAdjust each area individually, then select All and adjust the

entire screen.

iSelect Red,Green, or Blue and adjust the color tone, if necessary.

aThe adjustment screen changes each time you press [Enter].

jPress [Esc] to return to the area selection screen.

kRepeat the color adjustments to each area.

lReturn to step 5 and repeat all steps to adjust other levels.

mWhen you are finished, press [Menu] to exit.

Blending the Image Edges

You can use the projector's Edge Blending feature to create a seamless image

from multiple projectors (EB-1485Fi only).

Using Multiple Projectors 143

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press

[Enter].

bSelect Edge Blending and press [Enter].

cTurn on the Edge Blending,Line Guide, and Pattern Guide settings.

aIf the guide is not clear, you can change the color of the guide

using the Guide Color setting.

dSelect the edge you want to blend on each projector and press [Enter].

You see a screen like this:

eSelect the Blending setting and select On.

fSelect the Blend Start Position setting and adjust the blending start

position

aIf you created a unified image area using the edge blending

feature, set the Blend Start Position setting of the blended edge

to 0.

gSelect the Blend Range setting and use the arrow buttons to select the

width of the blended area so that the displayed guides are at the edges

of the overlapping area between the two images.

Using Multiple Projectors 144

aIf you created a unified image area using the edge blending

feature, set the Blend Range setting of the blended edge to 600.

hPress [Esc] to return to the previous screen.

iSelect the Blend Curve setting and select a gradient for the shaded area

on the projectors.

jWhen the edges are blended, turn off the Line Guide and Pattern

Guide settings on each projector to check the final settings.

kWhen you are finished, press [Menu].

Matching the Image Colors

You can match the display quality of multiple projectors that will project next

to each other.

Before you begin, turn on all the projectors so you can select image quality

settings that match on the unified screen.

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press

[Enter].

aOn the EB-1480Fi projector, select the Management menu

instead.

bSelect Color Matching and press [Enter].

cSet the Adjustment Level to 8.

Using Multiple Projectors 145

dSelect Brightness and adjust the value.

eSelect Red,Green, or Blue and adjust the color tone, if necessary.

fGo back to the top level menu and select the Operation menu and

press [Enter].

gSelect Light Source Brightness Control and press [Enter].

hSet the Light Source Mode to Custom.

iAdjust the Brightness Level.

jRepeat steps 1 through 5 multiple times, each time selecting to adjust

levels 7through 2in the same way.

kWhen you are finished, press [Menu].

Adjusting the Black Level

You can adjust the brightness and color tone of the areas where the images do

not overlap to create a seamless image (EB-1485Fi only).

a• You cannot adjust the Black Level setting when a test pattern is

displayed.

• If the Geometry Correction value is very large, you may not be able

to adjust the Black Level correctly.

• The brightness and tone may differ in areas where the images overlap

as well as in other areas even after performing the Black Level

adjustment.

• If you change the Edge Blending setting, the Black Level setting

returns to its default value.

Using Multiple Projectors 146

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press

[Enter].

bSelect Black Level and press [Enter].

cSelect Color Adjustment and press [Enter].

The adjustment areas are displayed based on the Edge Blending setting.

dUse the arrow buttons to select the area you want to adjust and press

[Enter].

The selected area is displayed in orange.

aWhen multiple screens are overlapping, adjust based on the area

with the most overlap (the brightest area). In the illustration

below, first align (2) with (1), and then adjust so that (3) aligns

with (2).

Using Multiple Projectors 147

eAdjust the black tone.

You can use the Brightness buttons to adjust the RGB values at the

same time.

fRepeat steps 4 and 5 as needed to adjust any remaining screen areas.

gWhen you are finished, press [Menu].

gg Related Links

• "Modifying the Black Level Adjustment Area" p.147

Modifying the Black Level Adjustment Area

If there are areas where the color does not match after adjusting the Black

Level setting, you can adjust them individually.

aSelect Area Correction in the Black Level setting and press [Enter].

bSelect Start Adjustments and press [Enter].

Boundary lines indicating where images overlap are displayed. The lines

are displayed based on the Edge Blending setting.

cUse the arrow buttons to select the boundary line you want to adjust.

Then press [Enter].

The selected line is displayed in orange.

dUse the arrow buttons to adjust the line position. Then press [Enter].

eUse the arrow buttons to select the point you want to move. Then press

[Enter].

The selected point is displayed in orange.

aYou can change the number of the displayed points using the

Points setting.

Using Multiple Projectors 148

fUse the arrow buttons to move the point.

gTo continue to move another point, press [Esc] and then repeat steps 5

and 6.

hTo adjust another boundary line, press [Esc] until the screen shown in

step 3 is displayed.

iWhen you are finished, press [Menu].

Adjusting RGBCMY

You can adjust the Hue,Saturation, and Brightness settings for R (red), G

(green), B (blue), C (cyan), M (magenta), and Y (yellow) color components.

Before you begin, turn on all the projectors so you can select color tone

settings that match on the unified screen.

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Image menu, and press [Enter].

bSelect RGBCMY and press [Enter].

cSelect the color to adjust, and press [Enter].

Using Multiple Projectors 149

dDo the following as necessary for each setting:

• To adjust the overall hue of the color, bluish - greenish - reddish,

adjust the Hue setting.

• To adjust the overall vividness of the color, adjust the Saturation

setting.

• To adjust the overall color brightness of the color, adjust the

Brightness setting.

eWhen you are finished, press [Menu].

Scaling an Image

You can project the same image from multiple projectors and use the Scale

feature to crop and combine them into one unified image area (EB-1485Fi

only).

aInput the image signal to display the image.

Using Multiple Projectors 150

bPress the [Menu] button, select the Multi-Projection menu, and press

[Enter].

cSelect Scale and press [Enter].

You see this screen:

dChoose one of the following options and press [Enter]:

•Auto to set the clip position automatically depending on the HDMI

Out Setting and Edge Blending settings.

•Manual to adjust clip ranges and position manually.

eSelect the Scale Mode setting and select one of these options:

•Zoom Display to maintain the image aspect ratio as you scale the

image.

•Full Display to adjust the image to the projector's screen size as you

scale the image.

fIf you select Manual, select one or more of the following scaling

options and adjust it as necessary:

• - or + to scale the image horizontally and vertically at the same time.

Using Multiple Projectors 151

•Scale Vertically to scale the image vertically only.

•Scale Horizontally to scale the image horizontally only.

gSelect the Clip Adjustment setting and use the arrow buttons to adjust

the coordinates and size of each image as you view the screen.

hSelect Clip Range to preview the clipped area you selected.

iWhen you are finished, press [Menu].

Projector Security Features 152

You can secure your projector to deter theft or prevent unintended use by

setting up the following security features:

• Password security to prevent people who do not know the password from

using the projector, and prevent changes to the startup screen and other

settings.

This acts as an anti-theft function as the projector cannot be used even if it

is stolen, and you can limit who can use the projector.

• Button lock security to block operation of the projector using the buttons

on the control panel.

This is useful at events or shows when you want to deactivate all buttons

during projection or at schools when you want to limit button operation.

• Security cabling to physically secure the projector in place.

gg Related Links

• "Password Security Types" p.152

• "Locking the Projector's Buttons" p.154

• "Installing a Security Cable" p.155

Password Security Types

You can set up the following types of password security using one shared

password:

•Power On Protection password prevents anyone from using the projector

without first entering a password. When plugging the power cord and

turning on the projector at first time, you must enter the correct password.

This also applies to Direct Power On and Auto Power On.

•Menu Protection of User's Logo prevents anyone from changing the

custom screen displayed when the projector turns on or receives an input

signal. The custom screen deters theft by identifying the projector's owner.

•Menu Protection of Schedule prevents anyone from changing the

projector's schedule settings.

•Menu Protection of Network prevents anyone from changing the

projector's Network settings.

•Menu Protection of Interactive prevents anyone from changing the

projector's Interactive settings.

gg Related Links

• "Setting a Password" p.152

• "Selecting Password Security Types" p.153

• "Entering a Password to Use the Projector" p.154

Setting a Password

To use password security, you must set a password.

aThe default password is set to "0000". Change this to your own

password.

aHold down the [Freeze] button on the remote control for about 5

seconds.

You see the Password Protection setting menu.

aIf Password Protection is already activated, you must enter the

correct password to display the Password Protection setting

menu.

Projector Security Features 153

bSelect Password and press [Enter].

You see the prompt "Change the password?".

cSelect Yes and press [Enter].

aIf you select No, the Password Protection setting menu is

displayed again.

dHold down the [Num] button on the remote control and use the

numeric buttons to set a four-digit password.

The password displays as **** as it is entered. A confirmation prompt is

displayed when you enter the fourth digit.

eEnter the password again.

You see the message "Password accepted". If you enter the password

incorrectly, a message is displayed prompting you to re-enter the

password.

fPress [Esc] to return to the menu.

gMake a note of the password and keep it in a safe place.

Selecting Password Security Types

After setting a password, you see this menu, allowing you to select the

password security types you want to use.

If you do not see this menu, hold down the [Freeze] button on the remote

control for 5 seconds until the menu appears.

• To prevent unauthorized use of the projector, set the Power On Protection

setting to On.

• To prevent changes to the projector's settings, select the Menu Protection

setting, press [Enter], and select the options as necessary.

• To prevent changes to the User's Logo screen or related display settings,

set the User's Logo setting to On.

• To prevent changes to the projector's schedule settings, set the Schedule

setting to On.

• To prevent changes to projector's network settings, set the Network

setting to On.

• To prevent changes to the projector's Interactive settings, set the

Interactive setting to On.

You can attach the password protect sticker to the projector as an additional

theft deterrent.

Projector Security Features 154

aBe sure to keep the remote control in a safe place; if you lose it, you will

not be able to enter the password.

Entering a Password to Use the Projector

When the password screen is displayed, enter the correct password.

aHold down the [Num] button on the remote control while you enter

the password using the numeric buttons.

The password screen closes.

bIf the password is incorrect, you see a message and a prompt to try

again. Enter the correct password to proceed.

Attention

• If an incorrect password is entered three times in succession, the message

"The projector's operation will be locked." is displayed for approximately

5 minutes, and the projector switches to standby mode. If this happens,

disconnect the power plug from the electrical outlet, reinsert it, and turn

the projector back on. The projector displays the password entry screen

again so that you can enter the correct password.

• If you have forgotten the password, make a note of the "Request Code:

xxxxx" number that appears on the screen and contact Epson for help.

• If you continue to repeat the above operation and input the wrong

password 30 times in succession, the message "The projector's operation

will be locked. Contact Epson as described in your documentation." is

displayed and the projector does not accept any more password entries.

Contact Epson for help.

Locking the Projector's Buttons

You can lock the buttons on the control panel to prevent anyone from using

the projector. The projector can still be operated using the remote control.

Projector Security Features 155

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press

[Enter].

bSelect Control Panel Lock and press [Enter].

cSelect one of these lock types and press [Enter]:

• To lock all of the projector's buttons, select Full Lock.

• To lock all buttons except the power button, select Except for Power.

You see a confirmation prompt.

dSelect Yes and press [Enter].

The Control Panel Lock setting takes effect.

gg Related Links

• "Unlocking the Projector's Buttons" p.155

Unlocking the Projector's Buttons

If the projector's buttons have been locked, do one of the following to unlock

them.

• Hold down the [Enter] button on the control panel for 7 seconds. A

message is displayed and the lock is released.

• Set the Control Panel Lock setting to Off in the projector's Management

menu.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

Installing a Security Cable

You can install the security cable on the projector to deter theft.

• Use the security slot on the projector to attach a Kensington Microsaver

Security system.

aFor more details on the Microsaver Security System, visit the

Kensington Web site.

http://www.kensington.com/

Projector Security Features 156

• Use the security cable attachment point on the projector to attach a wire

cable and secure it to a room fixture or heavy furniture.

aIf the safety wire lock attachment comes with the setting plate, you

can use it to secure the projector. You can also use a commercially

available theft-prevention wire lock. See the documentation supplied

with the wire lock for locking instructions.

Using the Projector on a Network

Follow the instructions in these sections to set up your projector for use on a network.

gg Related Links

• "Wired Network Projection" p.158

• "Wireless Network Projection" p.162

• "Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring)" p.172

• "Secure HTTP" p.177

• "Screen Sharing" p.179

Wired Network Projection 158

You can send images to your projector through a wired network. To do this,

connect the projector to your network, and then set up your projector and

computer for network projection.

After connecting and setting up the projector as described here, download

and install Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) from the following Web site.

epson.sn/

Epson iProjection software sets up your computer for network projection. It

also allows you to hold interactive meetings by projecting user's computer

screens over a network. See the Epson iProjection Operation Guide

(Windows/Mac) for instructions.

gg Related Links

• "Connecting to a Wired Network" p.158

• "Selecting Wired Network Settings" p.158

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Connecting to a Wired Network

To connect the projector to a wired local area network (LAN), use a 100Base-

TX or 10Base-T network cable. To ensure proper data transmission, use a

Category 5 shielded cable or better.

aConnect one end of the network cable to your network hub, switch, or

router.

bConnect the other end of the cable to the projector's LAN port.

Selecting Wired Network Settings

Before you can project from computers on your network, you need to select

network settings on the projector.

aMake sure you already connected the projector to your wired network

using the LAN port.

Wired Network Projection 159

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].

bSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].

cTo identify the projector over the network, select Projector Name and

enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long.

dSet the Priority Control Interface setting to Wired LAN.

eSelect the Wired LAN menu and press [Enter].

fAssign the IP settings for your network as necessary.

• If your network assigns addresses automatically, select IP Settings to

set the DHCP setting to On.

• If you must set addresses manually, select IP Settings to set the

DHCP setting to Off, and then enter the projector's IP Address,

Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address as necessary.

gTo prevent the IP address from being displayed on the network

information screen, set the IP Address Display setting to Off.

Wired Network Projection 160

hSelect the Network Projection menu and press [Enter].

iSet the Epson iProjection setting to On.

jSelect the options as necessary.

•Display LAN Info. lets you set the display format for the projector's

network information.

•Moderator Password lets you enter a four-digit number password

for accessing the projector as a moderator using Epson iProjection.

(No password is set by default.)

•Projector Keyword lets you turn on a security password to prevent

access to the projector by anyone not in the room with it. You must

enter a displayed, randomized keyword from a computer using

Epson iProjection to access the projector and share the current

screen.

•Keyword Interrupt Display lets you select whether to display a

projector keyword on the projected image when accessing the

projector using Epson iProjection.

kWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings

screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your

settings and exit the menus.

lPress the [LAN] button on the remote control.

The wired network settings complete when you see the correct IP

address on the network information screen.

Wired Network Projection 161

gg Related Links

• "Using the Displayed Keyboard" p.204

Wireless Network Projection 162

You can send images to your projector through a wireless network.

To do this, you must set up your projector and computer for wireless

projection.

You can connect the projector to your wireless network by configuring the

connection manually using the projector's Network menus.

After setting up the projector, download and install the network software

from the following Web site.

epson.sn/

Use the following software and documentation to set up and control wireless

projection:

• Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software allows you to hold interactive

meetings by projecting the computer screens of users over a network. See

the Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for instructions.

• Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) app allows you to project from iOS or

Android devices.

You can download Epson iProjection from the App Store or Google Play.

Any fees incurred when communicating with the App Store or Google Play

are the responsibility of the customer.

• Epson iProjection (Chromebook) app allows you to project from

Chromebook devices.

You can download Epson iProjection from the Chrome Web Store. Any fees

incurred when communicating with the Chrome Web Store are the

responsibility of the customer.

gg Related Links

• "Safety Instructions for Built-in Wireless LAN Module" p.162

• "Connection Methods for Wireless Network Projection" p.162

• "Installing the Wireless LAN Module" p.163

• "Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually" p.164

• "Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows" p.167

• "Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Mac" p.167

• "Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Simple AP Mode" p.167

• "Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Infrastructure Mode" p.168

• "Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device" p.170

• "Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer" p.171

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Safety Instructions for Built-in Wireless LAN Module

This projector contains a built-in wireless LAN module. Be sure to follow

these important guidelines when using a wireless LAN connection.

Warning

• Do not use the device near medical equipment such as pace makers.

Furthermore, when using the device, make sure there is no medical equipment

such as pace makers, in the surrounding area. Electromagnetic interference may

cause medical equipment to malfunction.

• Electromagnetic interference may cause automatically controlled equipment to

malfunction which could cause an accident. Do not use the device near

automatically controlled equipment such as automatic doors or fire alarms.

Caution

Make sure you keep a distance of at least 20 cm between the device and your body.

Otherwise, it could cause you to feel unwell.

Connection Methods for Wireless Network Projection

Choose a connection method for connecting your computer and projector

over a network based on your network environment.

• Simple AP mode lets you directly connect to smartphones, tablets, or

computers using your projector as an access point. When you use this

Wireless Network Projection 163

method, connect the projector using Quick Connection Mode of the Epson

iProjection software or use Screen Mirroring.

• Infrastructure mode lets you connect to smartphones, tablets, or computers

over a wireless network access point. When you use this method, connect

the projector using Advanced Connection Mode of the Epson iProjection

software.

Your projector has built-in wireless LAN modules. If you install an additional

optional wireless LAN module, you can use both network connection

methods at the same time. When you install the wireless LAN module, set the

Simple AP setting to On.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Simple AP

Installing the Wireless LAN Module

To use the additional wireless connections, install the Epson wireless LAN

module. Do not install any other type of wireless LAN module.

Attention

Never remove the module while its indicator is blue or flashing, or while you are

projecting wirelessly. This could damage the module or lose data.

Wireless Network Projection 164

aRemove both of the cable cover screws to open the cable cover.

bConnect the wireless LAN module to the USB-A port.

Selecting Wireless Network Settings Manually

Before you can project from your wireless network, you need to select

network settings for the projector.

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press

[Enter].

bSet the Wireless LAN Power setting to On.

Wireless Network Projection 165

cSelect the Network menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].

eTo identify the projector over the network, select Projector Name and

enter a name up to 16 alphanumeric characters long.

fSet the Priority Control Interface setting to Wireless LAN.

gSelect the connection method.

• For simple AP mode, set the Simple AP setting to On and go to step

12.

• For infrastructure mode, set the Simple AP setting to Off and go to

next step.

• If you installed the optional wireless LAN module and want to use

both connection methods at the same time, set the Simple AP setting

to On and go to next step.

hSelect the Wireless LAN menu and press [Enter].

The projector starts searching for access points.

aYou can also search for access points using the Search Access

Point setting manually.

iSelect the access point you want to connect to.

Wireless Network Projection 166

aIf you need to assign the SSID manually, select SSID to enter the

SSID.

jAssign the IP settings for your network as necessary.

• If your network assigns addresses automatically, select IP Settings to

set the DHCP setting to On.

• If you must set addresses manually, select IP Settings to set the

DHCP setting to Off, and then enter the projector's IP Address,

Subnet Mask, and Gateway Address as necessary.

kTo prevent the IP address from being displayed on the network

information screen, set the IP Address Display setting to Off.

lSelect the Network Projection menu and press [Enter].

mSet the Epson iProjection setting to On.

nSelect the options as necessary.

•SSID Display lets you select whether to display projector's SSID on

the network information screen and Home screen.

•Display LAN Info. lets you set the display format for the projector's

network information.

•Moderator Password lets you enter a four-digit number password

for accessing the projector as a moderator using Epson iProjection.

(No password is set by default.)

•Projector Keyword lets you turn on a security password to prevent

access to the projector by anyone not in the room with it. You must

enter a displayed, randomized keyword from a computer using

Epson iProjection to access the projector and share the current

screen.

•Keyword Interrupt Display lets you select whether to display a

projector keyword on the projected image when accessing the

projector using Epson iProjection.

oWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings

screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your

settings and exit the menus.

pPress the [LAN] button on the remote control.

Wireless Network Projection 167

The wireless network settings are complete when you see the correct IP

address on the network information screen.

When you have finished making wireless settings for your projector, you need

to select the wireless network on your computer. Then start the network

software to send images to your projector through a wireless network.

gg Related Links

• "Using the Displayed Keyboard" p.204

Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Windows

Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network on your

computer.

aTo access your wireless utility software, click the network icon on the

Windows taskbar.

bWhen connecting to devices over a wireless network access point, select

the network name (SSID) of the network the projector is connecting to.

cClick Connect.

Selecting Wireless Network Settings in Mac

Before connecting to the projector, select the correct wireless network in Mac.

aClick the Wi-Fi icon on the menu bar at the top of the screen.

bWhen connecting to devices over a wireless network access point, make

sure Wi-Fi is turned on and select the network name (SSID) of the

network the projector is connecting to.

Setting Up Wireless Network Security for Simple AP

Mode

You can set up security for your projector to use on a wireless network with

simple AP mode. You can use WPA2-PSK security.

aContact your network administrator for guidance on entering the

correct information.

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].

bSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].

Wireless Network Projection 168

cSelect Passphrase, press [Enter], and enter a passphrase from 8 to 63

characters long.

dWhen you finish entering a passphrase, go back to the Network

Settings screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save

your settings and exit the menus.

Setting Up Wireless Network Security for

Infrastructure Mode

You can set up security for your projector to use on a wireless network with

infrastructure mode. Set up one of the following security types to match the

settings used on your network:

• WPA3-PSK security

• WPA2/WPA3-PSK security

• WPA3-EAP security

• WPA2/WPA3-EAP security

aContact your network administrator for guidance on entering the

correct information.

aIf you want to set up WPA3-EAP or WPA2/WPA3-EAP security, make

sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector registration

type and placed directly on a USB storage device.

bPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].

cSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].

dSelect the Wireless LAN menu and press [Enter].

eSelect the Security setting and press [Enter].

Wireless Network Projection 169

fSelect the security settings to match your network settings.

gDo one of the following according to the security you selected.

•WPA3-PSK or WPA2/WPA3-PSK: Select Passphrase, press [Enter],

and enter a passphrase from 8 to 63 characters long. Then go to step

16.

•WPA3-EAP or WPA2/WPA3-EAP: Select EAP Type and press

[Enter].

hSelect the protocol for authentication as the EAP Type setting.

iTo import your certificate, select the certificate type and press [Enter].

•Client Certificate for the PEAP-TLS or EAP-TLS type

•CA certificate for all EAP types

aYou can also register the digital certificates using your Web

browser. However, be sure to register just once or the certificate

may not install correctly.

jSelect Save and press [Enter].

kFollow the on-screen instructions to connect a USB storage device to

the projector's USB-A port.

lPress [Enter] to display the certificate list.

mSelect the certificate to import using the displayed list.

A message is displayed prompting you to enter the password for the

certificate.

nEnter a password and press [Enter].

The certificate is imported and a completion message appears.

oSelect your EAP settings as necessary.

•User name lets you enter a user name using up to 64 alphanumeric

characters. When importing a client certificate, the name the

certificate was issued to is automatically set.

•Password lets you enter a password using up to 64 alphanumeric

characters for authentication when using the PEAP or EAP-FAST

type.

•Verify Server Certificate lets you select whether or not to verify the

server certificate when a CA certificate has been set.

•RADIUS Server Name lets you enter the server name to be verified.

pWhen you finish making settings, go back to the Network Settings

screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your

settings and exit the menus.

Wireless Network Projection 170

gg Related Links

• "Supported Client and CA Certificates" p.170

Supported Client and CA Certificates

You can register these types of digital certificates.

Client Certificate (PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS)

Specification Description

Format PKCS#12

Extension PFX, P12

Encryption RSA

Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512

Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit

Password Up to 64 alphanumeric characters; required

CA Certificate (PEAP/PEAP-TLS/EAP-TLS/EAP-FAST)

Specification Description

Format X509v3

Extension DER/CER/PEM

Encryption RSA

Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512

Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit

Encoding BASE64/Binary

Using a QR Code to Connect a Mobile Device

After selecting the wireless network settings for your projector, you can

display a QR code on the screen and use it to connect a mobile device using

the Epson iProjection (iOS/Android) app.

a• Make sure you have installed the latest version of Epson iProjection

on your device.

• You can download Epson iProjection for free from the App Store or

Google Play. Any fees incurred when communicating with the App

Store or Google Play are the responsibility of the customer.

• When using Epson iProjection in Quick connection mode, we

recommend making security settings.

aPress the [LAN] button on the remote control.

The QR code is displayed on the projected surface.

a• If you do not see the QR code, set the Display LAN Info.

setting to Text & QR Code in the projector's Network menu.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >

Epson iProjection >Display LAN Info.

• To hide the QR code, press [Esc].

• When the QR code is hidden, press [Enter] to display the code.

bStart Epson iProjection on your mobile device.

cRead the projected QR code using Epson iProjection to connect it to

the projector.

aTo correctly read the QR code, make sure you face the screen

squarely and closely enough so that the projected code fits into

the guide of the mobile device's QR code reader. If you are too

far from the screen, the code may not be read.

When a connection is established, select Contents menu from , and

then select the file you want to project.

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.225

Wireless Network Projection 171

Using a USB Key to Connect a Windows Computer

You can set up your USB flash drive as a USB key to quickly connect the

projector to a wireless LAN supported Windows computer. After creating the

USB key, you can quickly project images from the network projector.

aSet up the USB key using USB Key Setup Tool of the Epson iProjection

(Windows/Mac) software.

aSee the Epson iProjection Operation Guide (Windows/Mac) for

instructions.

bMake sure the wireless LAN module is installed or built into your

projector.

cTurn on the projector.

dPress the [LAN] button on the remote control.

You see the network information screen. Verify that an SSID and IP

address are displayed.

eConnect the USB key to the projector's USB-A1 port.

You see a projected message that the network information update is

complete.

fRemove the USB key.

gConnect the USB key to a USB port on your computer.

hFollow the on-screen instructions to install the necessary application.

a• If the Windows Firewall message is displayed, click Yes to

disable the firewall.

• You need administrator authority to install the software.

• If it is not installed automatically, double-click

MPPLaunch.exe in the USB key.

After a few minutes, your computer image is displayed by the projector.

iWhen you have finished projecting wirelessly, select the Safely Remove

Hardware option in the Windows taskbar, and then remove the USB

key from your computer.

aYou may need to restart your computer to reactivate your

wireless LAN connection.

gg Related Links

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring) 172

You can send image to your projector from mobile devices such as laptops,

smartphones, and tablets using Miracast technology.

If your device supports Miracast, you do not need to install any additional

software. When using a Windows computer, make sure the necessary adapter

for the Miracast connection is available.

Note the following limitations when using Screen Mirroring features.

• You cannot play an interlaced image.

• You cannot play multi-channel audio over 3ch (channel 3).

• You cannot project images with a resolution above 1920 × 1080 and a frame

rate above 30 fps.

• Images with a resolution of 1920 × 1200 are reduces to 1920 × 1080 before

being projected.

• You cannot play 3D video.

• You may not be able to view contents with copyright protection with a

Miracast connection depending on your device.

• Do not change the projector's Screen Mirroring during Screen Mirroring

projection. Doing so may cause the projector to disconnect and it may take

a while to re-connect.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen

Mirroring

• Do not turn off the projector directly by the breaker during Screen

Mirroring projection.

aMobile devices with Android installed or Windows 8.1 or later installed

mainly support Miracast.

Support for Miracast varies depending on the mobile device. See your

mobile device manual for details.

gg Related Links

• "Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings" p.172

• "Connecting Using Screen Mirroring with the Miracast Function" p.174

• "Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 10" p.175

• "Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 8.1" p.175

• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.225

Selecting Screen Mirroring Settings

You must select Screen Mirroring settings for your projector to project

images from your mobile device.

aIf you use Windows 10, you can cast images using the following

connections:

• Casting images from your device to the projector directly

• Casting images via local area network

When you cast images via local area network, the connection is more

stable and secure. Do one of the following to connect your projector to

a local area network:

• Connect a LAN cable.

• Select the Wireless LAN setting to connect to the wireless access

point.

To connect to a wireless access point, you need to install the optional

wireless LAN module.

Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring) 173

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press

[Enter].

bSet the Wireless LAN Power setting to On.

cSelect the Network menu and press [Enter].

dSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].

eSelect Priority Control Interface and press [Enter].

fChoose one of the following options:

• If you cast the data via local area network using the wired LAN,

select Wired LAN.

• If you cast the data directly or via wireless access point, select

Wireless LAN.

• If your device only supports casting data directly, select Wireless

LAN.

Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring) 174

gSet the Simple AP setting to On.

hGo back to the Network Settings screen and select Network

Projection.

iSet the Screen Mirroring setting to On.

jSelect the options as necessary.

•Adjust Image Quality lets you adjust the screen mirroring

speed/quality. Select a small number to improve the quality and

select large number to increase the speed.

•Capture lets you capture the projected image and paste it on a page

in whiteboard mode. If you select Enabled, the HDCP feature is

disabled and you may not be able to project content with the HDCP

feature.

•Screen Mirroring Info displays connection information when

projecting the Screen Mirroring source.

kWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings

screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your

settings and exit the menus.

Connecting Using Screen Mirroring with the Miracast

Function

If your mobile device such as a smartphone supports Miracast, you can

connect it to the projector wirelessly and project images. You can play audio

through the projector's speaker system by connecting using Screen Mirroring.

aSelect the Screen Mirroring setting on your projector as necessary.

bPress the [LAN] button on the remote control to switch to the Screen

Mirroring source.

You see the network information screen.

cOn your mobile device, use your Miracast function to search for the

projector.

You see a list of available devices.

dSelect the projector's Projector Name from the list.

eIf you see the PIN entry screen on your mobile device, enter the PIN

code displayed on the network information screen or at the upper left

of the projected image.

The projector displays the image from your mobile device.

aIt may take some time until the connection is established. While

connecting, do not disconnect the projector's power cord. Doing

so may cause your device to freeze or malfunction.

Depending on the mobile device, you may need to delete a device

when connecting. Follow the on-screen instructions on your

device.

Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring) 175

Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 10

You can set up your computer for wireless projection and play audio through

the projector's speaker system by connecting using Screen Mirroring.

aSelect the Screen Mirroring setting on your projector as necessary.

bPress the [LAN] button on the remote control to switch to the Screen

Mirroring source.

You see the network information screen.

cDisplay Action Center, and then select Connect.

You see a list of available devices.

dSelect the projector's Projector Name from the list.

eIf you see the PIN entry screen on your computer, enter the PIN code

displayed on the network information screen or at the bottom right of

the projected image.

The projector displays the image from your computer.

aIt may take some time until the connection is established. While

connecting, do not disconnect the projector's power cord. Doing

so may cause your device to freeze or malfunction.

Connecting Using Screen Mirroring in Windows 8.1

You can set up your computer for wireless projection from Charms in

Windows 8.1. You can play audio through the projector's speaker system by

connecting using Screen Mirroring.

aSelect Screen Mirroring setting on your projector as necessary.

bPress the [LAN] button on the remote control to switch to the Screen

Mirroring source.

You see the network information screen.

Wireless Network Projection from a Mobile Device (Screen Mirroring) 176

cOn your computer, select Devices from Charms and select Project.

dSelect Add a wireless display.

You see a list of available devices.

eSelect the projector's Projector Name from the list.

fIf you see the PIN entry screen on your computer, enter the PIN code

displayed on the network information screen or at the bottom right of

the projected image.

The projector displays the image from your computer.

aIt may take some time until the connection is established. While

connecting, do not disconnect the projector's power cord. Doing

so may cause your device to freeze or malfunction.

Secure HTTP 177

You can use the HTTPS protocol to increase security between the projector

and a Web browser communicating with it. To do this, you create a server

certificate, install it on the projector, and turn on the Secure HTTP setting in

the projector menus to verify the reliability of the Web browser.

Even if you do not install a server certificate, the projector automatically

creates a self-signed certificate and allows communication. However, because

the self-signed certificate cannot verify reliability from a Web browser, you

see a warning about the server's reliability when you access the projector from

a Web browser. This warning does not prevent communication.

gg Related Links

• "Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Menus" p.177

Importing a Web Server Certificate Using the Menus

You can create your Web server certificate, and import it using the projector

menus and a USB flash drive.

aYou can also register the digital certificates from your Web browser.

However, be sure to register just once or the certificate may not install

correctly.

aMake sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector

registration and directly placed on the USB storage device.

bPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].

cSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].

dSelect the Projector Control menu and press [Enter].

eSet the Secure HTTP setting to On.

fSelect Web Server Certificate and press [Enter].

gSelect Save and press [Enter].

hFollow the on-screen instructions to connect a USB storage device to

the projector's USB-A port.

iPress [Enter] to display the certificate list.

jSelect the certificate to import using the displayed list.

A message is displayed prompting you to enter the password for the

certificate.

kEnter a password and press [Enter].

The certificate is imported and a completion message appears.

gg Related Links

• "Supported Web Server Certificates" p.178

Secure HTTP 178

Supported Web Server Certificates

You can register these types of digital certificates.

Web Server Certificate (Secure HTTP)

Specification Description

Format PKCS#12

Extension PFX, P12

Encryption RSA

Hashes MD5/SHA-1/SHA-256/SHA-384/SHA-512

Key length 512/1024/2048/4096 bit

Common name Network host name

Organization Optional

Password Up to 64 alphanumeric characters; required

Screen Sharing 179

You can distribute the currently projected screen image to up to four

projectors that are connected to the same network. This allows you to view

the image at the same time from other projectors.

You can also draw on the received images using the interactive function.

(Some drawing features are not available. See the interactive toolbar for

available features.)

Note the following limitations when using the Screen Sharing function.

• This function is available only for supported models.

• You cannot distribute images that are protected by HDCP.

• You cannot change the projector's Network settings during Screen Sharing.

• The Screen Type setting in the Installation menu must be set to 16:9,

16:10, or 4:3.

gg Related Links

• "Preparing For Screen Sharing" p.179

• "Sharing the Screen" p.180

• "Receiving Shared Screen Images" p.181

Preparing For Screen Sharing

You need to select settings on both the distributing and receiving projectors

before using Screen Sharing.

• On the distributing projector:

• Connect the projector to the network.

• Make sure the Screen Sharing setting is set to On.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen Sharing

• If you want to skip authentication of keywords for other projectors so you

can quickly connect to them, set the Connection Mode setting to

Keyword Off.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen Sharing

>Connection Mode

• On the receiving projectors:

• Connect the projectors to the same network as the distributing projector.

• Make sure that no computer is connecting to the projector using the

Epson iProjection software.

• Make sure the Screen Type setting in the Installation menu is the same as

the distributing projector.

• Make sure the Screen Sharing setting is set to On.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen Sharing

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.225

Screen Sharing 180

Sharing the Screen

On the projector distributing the shared screens, you must connect to the

receiving projectors over the network before you can share screens with them.

aTurn on the projector and display an image.

bPress the [Home] button.

cSelect Screen Sharing.

dEnter the IP address of the projector you want to distribute images to

and select Connect.

aTo connect to a projector that you have previously connected to,

select the IP address from the displayed list.

The projector starts connecting.

eEnter the Projector Keyword as necessary.

When the connection is established, the bar indicating the shared status

appears at the top middle of the screen.

fRepeat steps 3 and 4 as needed to connect to more projectors.

gSelect the input source to project images you want to share.

The image is distributed to the receiving projector.

To finish sharing, select the icon.

Screen Sharing 181

a• You cannot distribute the image of screens such as home screen.

• To disconnect one projector, go to the projector selection screen and

select Disconnect.

• To disconnect all projectors, go to the projector selection screen and

select Disconnect All.

• You can select whether or not to allow drawing on the distributed

screen.

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.225

Receiving Shared Screen Images

Before receiving the screen, make sure the Screen Sharing setting is set to On.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen Sharing

On each receiving projector, press the [LAN] button to display the shared

screen image.

To remove the received image during projection, press the [Esc] button.

a• You cannot use the Epson iProjection software and screen sharing

simultaneously.

• You cannot draw on received images when projecting an additional

image at the same time.

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.225

Monitoring and Controlling the Projector

Follow the instructions in these sections to monitor and control the projector over a network.

gg Related Links

• "Epson Projector Management" p.183

• "Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser" p.184

• "Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser" p.189

• "Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts" p.190

• "Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP" p.191

• "Using ESC/VP21 Commands" p.192

• "PJLink Support" p.193

• "Crestron Connected Support" p.194

• "Setting Projector Event Schedules" p.199

Epson Projector Management 183

Epson Projector Management software (Windows only) lets you monitor and

control your projector through the network. See the Epson Projector

Management Operation Guide for instructions.

You can download Epson Projector Management from the following Web

site.

epson.sn/

gg Related Links

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 184

Once you have connected your projector to your network, you can select

projector settings and control projection using a compatible Web browser.

This lets you access the projector remotely.

a• Make sure the computer and projector are connected to the network.

If you are connecting wirelessly, connect to devices over a wireless

network access point.

• You can use the following Web browsers.

• Internet Explorer 11 or later (Windows)

• Microsoft Edge (Windows)

• Safari (Mac, iOS)

• Chrome (Android)

• While using the Web browser, do not connect using a proxy server.

You cannot select all of the projector menu settings or control all

projector functions using a Web browser.

• If you set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the

projector's Operation menu, you can use a Web browser to select

settings and control projection even if the projector is in standby

mode (when the power is off).

aMake sure the projector is turned on.

bMake sure your computer or device is connected to the same network

as the projector.

cStart your Web browser on the computer or device.

dGo to the Epson Web Control screen by entering the projector's IP

address into the browser's address box. When entering an IPv6 address,

wrap the address with [ and ].

You see the Epson Web Control screen.

AControls the projector remotely.

BDisplays a test pattern.

CSets detailed projector settings.

DOpens the Crestron Connected operation window. Available only when

you set the Crestron Connected system.

EOperates the projector's menu settings with your finger or mouse.

eSelect the option corresponding to the projector function you want to

control.

Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 185

a• You may need to log in to access some of the options on the

Epson Web Control screen. If you see a log in window, enter

your user name and password.

• When accessing the Basic Control option, the user name is

EPSONREMOTE and the default password is guest.

• When accessing other options, the user name is

EPSONWEB and the default password is admin.

• You can change the password in Web Control Password in

the projector's Network menu.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Web Control Password

gg Related Links

• "Web Control Options" p.185

• "Crestron Connected Support" p.194

• "Network Menu - Network Settings Menu" p.220

Web Control Options

Basic Control

a• If you see a log in window, enter your user name and password. (The

user name is EPSONREMOTE and the default password is guest.)

• You can change the password in Remote Password in the projector's

Network menu.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Remote Password

AReturns to the Epson Web Control screen.

BTurns the projector on or off.

CSelects the input source.

Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 186

DTurns the video and audio on or off temporarily.

EPauses or resumes images.

FDisplays the QR code.

GAdjusts the speaker volume.

HSearches for sources.

OSD Control Pad

AReturns to the Epson Web Control screen.

BDisplays the projector's setting menus.

CUse your finger or mouse to navigate the menus.

DResets the selected setting to its default value.

EReturns to the previous menu.

FDisplays help topics.

Test Pattern

AReturns to the Epson Web Control screen.

BDisplays available test patterns; select to project a test pattern. (The available test

patterns vary depending on your projector model.)

CTurns off test pattern display.

Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 187

Advanced

AOpens the menus.

BDisplays the menu name you selected.

CSpecifies the projector settings.

DLock/unlock the projector settings.

EUpdates the projector settings.

aYou cannot change the following settings using Epson Web Control.

•EDID

•USB Display

•HDMI Link

•Fixed Installation

•Setting Plate Installation Guide

•Auto Screen Adjustment

•Image Shift

•Connect ELPCB02

•Touch Unit

•Pattern Display

•Split Screen Setting

•User Button

•User's Logo

•User Pattern

•Language

•Display Logs

•Search Access Point

•Crestron Connected

•Pen/Touch menu

•Test Print

•Check Connection

•Send a test e-mail

•HDBaseT Signal Level (EB-1485Fi only)

•Event ID

•Antenna Level

•ECO menu

•Reset Network Settings

Controlling a Networked Projector Using a Web Browser 188

aYou can select the following settings only with Epson Web Control.

• Monitor Password (up to 16 alphanumeric characters)

• IPv6 Settings (manual)

• HTTP port (port number used for Web Control except for 80

[default], 843, 3620, 3621, 3625, 3629, 4352, 4649, 5357, 10000,

10001, 41794)

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Network Settings Menu" p.220

Registering Digital Certificates from a Web Browser 189

You can register the digital certificates on the projector to provide security for

your presentation files.

aYou can also register the digital certificates in the projector's Network

menu. However, be sure to register just once or the certificate may not

install correctly.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Wireless LAN >Client Certificate

sNetwork >Network Settings >Wireless LAN >CA certificate

sNetwork >Network Settings >Projector Control >Secure HTTP

>Web Server Certificate

aMake sure your digital certificate file is compatible with projector

registration.

bMake sure the projector is turned on.

cStart your Web browser on a computer or device connected to the

network.

dGo to the Epson Web Control screen by entering the projector's IP

address into the browser's address box.

eSelect Advanced.

a• You may need to log in before you see the Advanced screen. If

a login screen is displayed, enter your user name and

password. (The user name is EPSONWEB and the default

password is admin.)

• You can change the password in Web Control Password in

the projector's Network menu.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Web Control Password

fSelect to open the menus, select Network, and select Certificate.

gSelect the certificate file you want to register.

hEnter the password in the Password box, and then click Send.

iWhen you finish registering the certificate, click Apply to finalize your

changes and complete the registration.

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu" p.221

• "Network Menu - Projector Control Menu" p.224

• "Network Menu - Network Settings Menu" p.220

Setting Up Projector Network E-Mail Alerts 190

You can set up the projector to send you an e-mail alert over the network if

there is a problem with the projector.

If you set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the projector's

Operation menu, you can receive the e-mail alerts even if the projector is in

standby mode (when the power is off).

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].

bSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].

cSelect the Mail Notification menu and press [Enter].

dSet the Mail Notification setting to On.

eEnter the IP address for the SMTP Server option.

aDo not use "127.x.x.x" (where x is a number from 0 to 255) for

the SMTP Server.

fSelect a number for the SMTP server Port Number, from 0 to 65535

(default is 25).

gSelect a type of Authentication of SMTP server.

hEnter a User Name for the SMTP server.

iEnter a Password for the SMTP server authentication.

jEnter the e-mail address to be indicated as the sender in From.

kChoose an address field, enter the e-mail address, and select the alerts

you want to receive. Repeat for up to three addresses.

aYour e-mail address can be up to 64 alphanumeric characters

long.

lWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings

screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your

settings and exit the menus.

aIf a critical problem causes a projector to shut down, you may not

receive an e-mail alert.

gg Related Links

• "Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages" p.190

• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.213

Network Projector E-mail Alert Messages

When a problem occurs with a projector on the network, and you selected to

receive e-mail alerts, you receive an e-mail containing the following

information:

• The email address set in From as the mail sender

•Epson Projector in the subject line

• The name of the projector experiencing a problem

• The IP address of the affected projector

• Detailed information about the problem

Setting Up Monitoring Using SNMP 191

Network administrators can install SNMP (Simple Network Management

Protocol) software on network computers so they can monitor projectors. If

your network uses this software, you can set up the projector for SNMP

monitoring.

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].

bSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].

cSelect the Projector Control menu and press [Enter].

dSet the SNMP setting to On.

eEnter up to two IP addresses to receive SNMP notifications, using 0 to

255 for each address field.

aDo not use these addresses: 224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255

(where x is a number from 0 to 255). This projector supports

SNMP agent version 1 (SNMPv1).

fEnter the SNMP Community Name up to 32 alphanumeric characters

long.

gWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings

screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your

settings and exit the menus.

Using ESC/VP21 Commands 192

You can control the projector from an external device using ESC/VP21.

gg Related Links

• "ESC/VP21 Command List" p.192

• "Cable Layouts" p.192

ESC/VP21 Command List

When the power ON command is transmitted to the projector, the power

turns on and it enters warm-up mode. When the projector's power has turned

on, a colon ":" (3Ah) is returned.

When a command is input, the projector executes the command and returns a

":", and then accepts the next command.

If the command being processed terminates abnormally, an error message is

output and a ":" is returned.

You can check the available commands in the projector's Specifications.

gg Related Links

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Cable Layouts

Serial connection

• Connector shape: D-Sub 9-pin (male)

• Projector input port name: RS-232C

• Cable type: Crossover (null modem) cable

In the following illustration, the projector side is shown on the left, and the

computer side on the right:

Signal name Function

GND Signal wire ground

TD Transmit data

RD Receive data

Communications protocol

• Default baud rate setting: 9600 bps

• Data length: 8 bit

• Parity: None

• Stop-bit: 1 bit

• Flow control: None

PJLink Support 193

PJLink was established by the JBMIA (Japan Business Machine and

Information System Industries Association) as a standard protocol for

controlling network-compatible projector's as part of their efforts to

standardize projector control protocols.

The projector complies with the PJLink Class2 standard established by the

JBMIA.

The port number used for the PJLink search function is 4352 (UDP).

You need to make network settings before you can use PJLink.

It complies with all commands except for the following commands defined by

PJLink Class2, and agreement was confirmed by the PJLink standard

adaptability verification.

http://pjlink.jbmia.or.jp/english/

• Non-compatible commands

You can check the non-compatible commands in the projector's

Specifications.

• Input ports and corresponding input source number

Input port name Input source number

Computer1 11

Computer2 12

Video 21

HDMI1 32

HDMI2 33

HDMI3 36

USB1 41

USB2 42

LAN 52

USB Display 53

HDBaseT (EB-1485Fi only) 56

Screen Mirroring1 57

• Manufacturer name displayed for "Manufacture name information query"

EPSON

• Model name displayed for "Product name information query"

• EPSON 1485Fi/1485FT

• EPSON 1480Fi/1480FT

gg Related Links

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Crestron Connected Support 194

If you are using the Crestron Connected network monitoring and control

system, you can set up your projector for use on the system. Crestron

Connected lets you control and monitor your projector using a Web browser.

a• You cannot use the Message Broadcasting feature in Epson Projector

Management when you use Crestron Connected.

• If you set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the

projector's Operation menu, you can control the projector even if

the projector is in standby mode (when the power is off).

For additional information on Crestron Connected, visit the Crestron Web

site.

https://www.crestron.com/products/line/crestron-connected

To monitor devices in the system, you can use Crestron RoomView Express

or Crestron Fusion provided by Crestron. You can communicate with the

help desk and send emergency messages. See the following Web site for

details.

http://www.crestron.com/getroomview

This manual describes how to perform operations on your computer using a

Web browser.

gg Related Links

• "Setting Up Crestron Connected Support" p.194

• "Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron Connected" p.194

Setting Up Crestron Connected Support

To set up your projector for monitoring and control using a Crestron

Connected system, make sure your computer and projector are connected to

the network. If you are connecting wirelessly, connect to devices over a

wireless network access point.

aPress the [Menu] button, select the Network menu, and press [Enter].

bSelect Network Settings and press [Enter].

cSelect the Projector Control menu and press [Enter].

dSet the Crestron Connected setting to On to allow the projector to be

detected.

eWhen you finish selecting settings, go back to the Network Settings

screen, select Set, and follow the on-screen instructions to save your

settings and exit the menus.

fTurn off the projector, and then turn it on again to enable the setting.

Controlling a Networked Projector Using Crestron

Connected

Once you have set up your projector to use Crestron Connected, you can

control and monitor projection using a compatible Web browser.

aStart your Web browser on a computer connected to the network.

bType the projector's IP address into the browser's address box and press

the computer's Enter key.

Crestron Connected Support 195

You see the Epson Web Control screen.

cSelect Crestron Connected.

You see this screen:

dSelect the input source that you want to control in the Sources List box.

You can scroll through available sources using the up and down arrows

in the box.

eTo control projection remotely, click the on-screen buttons that

correspond to the projector's remote control buttons. You can scroll

through button options at the bottom of the screen.

aThese on-screen buttons do not directly correspond to the

projector's remote control buttons:

•OK acts as the [Enter] button

•Menu displays the projector's menu

fTo view information about the projector, click the Info tab.

gTo change the projector, Crestron Control, and password settings, click

the Tools tab, select settings on the displayed screen, and then click

Send.

Crestron Connected Support 196

hWhen you finish selecting settings, click Exit to exit the program.

gg Related Links

• "Crestron Connected Operation Window" p.196

• "Crestron Connected Tools Window" p.197

Crestron Connected Operation Window

Settings on the operation window let you control the projector and adjust the

projection image.

APower Turns the projector on or off.

Vol-/Vol+ Adjusts the volume.

A/V Mute Turns the video and audio on or off.

BSwitches to the image from the selected input source. To display input sources

that are not shown in Sources List, click (a) or (b) to scroll up or down. The

current video signal input source is displayed in blue.

You can change the source name if necessary.

CFreeze Images are paused or released.

Contrast Adjusts the difference between light and shade in the

images.

Brightness Adjusts the image brightness.

Color Adjusts the color saturation for the images.

Sharpness Adjusts the image sharpness.

Zoom Enlarges or reduces the image without changing the

projection size. Click the arrow buttons to change the

position of an enlarged image.

DArrow buttons Performs the same operations as the arrow buttons on

the remote control.

OK Performs the same operation as [Enter] on the remote

control.

Menu Displays and closes the projector's menu.

Auto Optimizes Tracking,Sync., and Position in the

projector's Signal I/O menu while projecting an analog

RGB signal from Computer1 or Computer2 port.

Search Changes to the next input source that is sending an

image.

Esc Performs the same operation as the [Esc] button on the

remote control.

ETools Changes settings in the projector that is currently

connected.

Info Displays information on the projector that is currently

connected.

Help Displays the Help Desk window. Used to send

messages to, and receive messages from, the

administrator using Crestron RoomView Express.

Crestron Connected Support 197

Crestron Connected Tools Window

Settings on the Tools window let you customize various projector setup

features.

AMake settings for Crestron central controllers.

BProjector Name Enter a name to differentiate the projector that is

currently connected from other projectors on the

network. (up to 16 alphanumeric characters)

Location Enter an installation location name for the projector

that is currently connected on the network. (up to 32

alphanumeric characters and symbols)

Assigned To Enter a user name for the projector. (up to 32

alphanumeric characters and symbols)

DHCP Select to use DHCP. You cannot enter an IP address if

DHCP is enabled.

IP Address Enter the IP address to assign to the currently

connected projector.

Subnet Mask Enter a subnet mask for the currently connected

projector.

Default Gateway Enter the gateway address for the currently connected

projector.

Send Click to confirm the changes made to the Projector.

CEnabled (Admin

Password)

Select to require a password to open the Tools window.

New Password Enter the new password when changing the password

to open the Tools window. (up to 26 alphanumeric

characters)

Confirm Enter the same password as you entered in New

Password. If the passwords are not the same, an error

is displayed.

Send Click to confirm the changes made to the Admin

Password.

Crestron Connected Support 198

DEnabled (User

Password)

Select to require a password to open the operation

window on the computer.

New Password Enter the new password when changing the password

to open the operation window. (up to 26 alphanumeric

characters)

Confirm Enter the same password as you entered in New

Password. If the passwords are not the same, an error

is displayed.

Send Click to confirm the changes made to the User

Password.

Setting Projector Event Schedules 199

You can schedule up to 30 events to occur automatically on your projector,

such as turning the projector on or off or switching the input source. The

projector performs the selected events on the specified date and time in the

schedule you set up.

Warning

Do not place flammable objects in front of the lens. If you schedule the projector

to turn on automatically, flammable objects in front of the lens could catch on a

fire.

a• If you set a Menu Protection of Schedule to On, turn it off first.

•Light Source Calibration does not start if the projector is not used

continuously for more than 20 minutes, or regularly turned off by

shutting off the power outlet. Set Light Source Calibration events to

occur only after 100 hours of usage.

aSet the date and time in the Date & Time menu in the projector's

Management menu.

bPress the [Menu] button, select the Management menu, and press

[Enter].

cSelect Schedule Settings and press [Enter].

dSelect Schedule and press [Enter].

eSelect Add New and press [Enter].

Setting Projector Event Schedules 200

fSelect the event details you want to perform.

gSelect the date and time at which you want the event to occur.

hSelect Save and press [Enter].

The scheduled events are displayed on the screen with icons indicating

the event status.

A: valid schedule

: regular schedule

: invalid schedule

BThe date currently selected (highlighted in yellow)

C: one time schedule

: regular schedule

: standby schedule (turns communication on or off during standby)

: invalid schedule

iTo edit a scheduled event, select the schedule and press [Enter].

Setting Projector Event Schedules 201

jSelect an option from the menu displayed.

•On or Off lets you enable or disable the selected event.

•Edit lets you change the event details or date and time.

•Clear lets you remove the scheduled event from a list.

kSelect Setup complete, then select Yes.

To delete all scheduled events, select Schedule Reset.

gg Related Links

• "Selecting Password Security Types" p.153

Adjusting the Menu Settings

Follow the instructions in these sections to access the projector menu system and change projector settings.

gg Related Links

• "Using the Projector's Menus" p.203

• "Using the Displayed Keyboard" p.204

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.207

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

• "Projector Display Settings - Display Menu" p.211

• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.213

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

• "Projector Network Settings - Network Menu" p.219

• "Projector Pen And Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu" p.227

• "Projector Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu" p.229

• "Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu" p.233

• "Image Quality Memory Settings - Memory Menu" p.235

• "Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu" p.236

• "Projector Initial Settings and Reset Options - Initial/All Settings Menu" p.237

• "Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup)" p.238

Using the Projector's Menus 203

You can use the projector's menus to adjust the settings that control how your

projector works. The projector displays the menus on the screen.

aPress the [Menu] button on the control panel or remote control.

You see the menu screen.

bPress the up or down arrow buttons to move through the menus listed

on the left. The settings for each menu are displayed on the right.

aThe available settings depend on the current input source.

cTo change settings in the displayed menu, press [Enter].

dPress the up or down arrow button to move through the settings.

eTo return all the menu settings to their default values, select Initial/All

Settings.

fWhen you finish changing settings on a menu, press [Esc].

gPress [Menu] or [Esc] to exit the menus.

aThe arrow indicates that the menu contains sub items. When you

turn on a menu setting or select a specific value for it, the menu system

displays the sub items.

aIf interactive pen or finger touch operations are available with your

projector, you can select menus and settings using the interactive pen

or finger touch operation. When you exit the menus, select .

Using the Displayed Keyboard 204

You can use the displayed keyboard to enter numbers and characters.

aUse the arrow buttons on the control panel or remote control to

highlight the number or character you want to enter and press the

[Enter] button.

aEach time you select the A/a key, the characters change between

upper case and lower case. Each time you select the SYM1/2 key,

the symbols enclosed by the frame change.

bAfter entering the text, select OK on the keyboard to confirm your

entries. Select Cancel to cancel entering text.

aYou can select projector settings and control projection over a network

using a Web browser from your computer.

Some symbols cannot be entered using the displayed keyboard. Use

your Web browser to enter the text.

gg Related Links

• "Available Text Using the Displayed Keyboard" p.204

Available Text Using the Displayed Keyboard

You can enter the following text when using the displayed keyboard.

Text type Details

Numbers 0123456789

Alphabet ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY

abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz

Symbols ! " # $ % & ' ( ) * + , - . / : ; < = > ? @ [ \ ]

^_`{|}~

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu 205

Settings on the Image menu let you adjust the quality of your image. The

available settings depend on the currently selected color mode and input

source.

Setting Options Description

Color Mode See the list of

available color

modes

Adjusts the vividness of image colors for

various image types and environments.

Brightness Various levels

available

Lightens or darkens the overall image.

Contrast Various levels

available

Adjusts the difference between light and

dark areas of the image.

Color Saturation Various levels

available

Adjusts the intensity of the image colors.

Tint Various levels

available

Adjusts the balance of green to magenta

tones in the image.

Setting Options Description

Sharpness Various levels

available

Adjusts the sharpness or softness of

image details.

White Balance Color Temp. Sets the color temperature according to

the color mode you selected. Higher

values tint the image blue and lower

values tint the image red.

G-M Correction Makes fine adjustments to the color tone.

Higher values tint the image green and

lower values tint the image red.

Custom Adjusts the individual R (red), G (green),

and B (blue) components of the offset

and gain.

Dynamic Contrast High Speed

Normal

Off

Adjusts the projected luminance based

on the image brightness.

Noise Reduction Various levels

available

Reduces flickering in images.

MPEG Noise

Reduction

Strong

Standard

Weak

Off

Reduces the noise or artifacts seen in

MPEG video.

Gamma -2 to 2

Custom

Adjusts the coloring by selecting one of

the gamma correction values, or referring

to a gamma graph.

RGBCMY Various levels

available

Adjusts the hue, saturation, and

brightness of each color R (red), G

(green), B (blue), C (cyan), M (magenta),

Y (yellow) individually.

Image Quality Settings - Image Menu 206

Setting Options Description

Deinterlacing Off

Video

Film/Auto

Sets whether or not to convert

interlaced-to-progressive signals for

certain video image types.

•Off: for fast-moving video images.

•Video: for most video images.

•Film/Auto: for movies, computer

graphics, and animation.

Setting is only displayed when the

current signal is interlaced signal

(480i/576i/1080i).

Super-resolution Fine Line Adjust

Soft Focus Detail

Reduces blurring when projecting low

resolution images.

Detail

Enhancement

Strength

Range

Creates a more emphatic texture and

material feel of the image.

Reset to Defaults — Resets all settings for the current color

mode.

Source — Displays settings saved for each input

source.

To change settings for an input source,

make sure the source is connected and

select that source.

Resolution Auto

Wide

Normal

Sets the input signal resolution if not

detected automatically using the Auto

option.

Setting is only displayed when the

current source is Computer.

Aspect See the list of

available aspect

ratios

Sets the aspect ratio (width-to-height

ratio) for the selected input source.

(Turn off the Scale setting or set the

Scale Mode setting to Full Display first

(EB-1485Fi only).)

Setting is only displayed when the

current source is Computer, Video,

HDMI, or HDBaseT.

Setting Options Description

Scale

(EB-1485Fi only)

Various scale

options

When using multiple projectors to

project one image, adjusts the scale of the

image displayed by each projector.

Analog Signal

Adjustment

Auto Setup Set to On to automatically optimize

computer image quality.

Setting is only displayed when the

current source is Computer.

Tracking Adjusts the signal to eliminate vertical

stripes in computer images.

Setting is only displayed when the

current source is Computer.

Sync. Adjusts the signal to eliminate fuzziness

or flickering in computer images.

Setting is only displayed when the

current source is Computer.

Position Adjusts the image location on the screen.

Setting is only displayed when the

current source is Computer or Video.

Reset to Defaults — Resets all settings for current input

source.

Reset Image

Settings

— Resets all adjustment values on the

Image menu to their default settings.

a• The Brightness setting does not affect light source brightness. To

change the light source brightness, select the Light Source

Brightness Control setting in the projector's Operation menu.

• You can restore the default settings of the Tracking,Sync., and

Position settings by pressing the [Auto] button on the remote

control.

gg Related Links

• "Available Color Modes" p.78

• "Available Image Aspect Ratios" p.74

• "Scaling an Image" p.149

• "Adjusting the Image Color" p.80

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu 207

Normally the projector automatically detects and optimizes the input signal

settings. If you need to customize the settings, you can use the Signal I/O

menu. The available settings depend on the currently selected input source.

Setting Options Description

Volume Various levels

available for each

source

Adjusts the volume of projector’s speaker

system.

You can also adjust the volume of

external speakers.

Setting is only displayed when the audio

is not output to AV system.

Source — Displays settings saved for each input

source.

To change settings for an input source,

make sure the source is connected and

select that source.

Setting Options Description

Signal Format Video Signal Sets the signal type from the input

sources. If interference appears or no

image appears when set to Auto, select

the appropriate signal according to the

connected equipment.

Setting is only displayed when the

current source is Video.

Video Range Sets the video range to match the setting

of input source.

Setting is only displayed when the

current source is HDMI or HDBaseT.

Mic Input Level Various levels

available

Adjusts the input level from a

microphone.

When Mic Input Level is turned up, the

volume of the other connected device is

turned down; when it is turned down,

the volume of the other connected device

is turned up.

Setting is only displayed when the audio

is not output to AV system.

Overscan Auto

Off

Changes the projected image ratio to

make the edges visible by a selectable

percentage or automatically.

Setting is only displayed when the input

signal is component signal.

EDID Various values

available

Describes the display capabilities of your

projector. Change this setting as

necessary according to the resolution of

the current input source.

Setting is only displayed when the

current source is HDMI or HDBaseT.

Reset to Defaults — Resets all settings for current input

source.

Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu 208

Setting Options Description

A/V Output While Projecting

Always On

Set to Always On to output audio and

images to external devices when the

projector is in standby mode.

Setting is only displayed when Quick

Startup is set to Off.

Inverse Audio On

Off

Set to On to invert the audio's left and

right channels to match the projector

installation position.

Audio Output Auto

Audio1

Audio2

Audio3

Sets the audio input port when projecting

from any sources other than the HDMI,

HDBaseT (EB-1485Fi only), LAN, and

Screen Mirroring. When you input audio

from the Audio port, select Audio3.

HDMI Audio

Output

HDMI1

HDMI2

HDMI3

Sets the audio input port when projecting

from HDMI ports. When you input

audio from the Audio port, select

Audio3.

Monitor Out Port Monitor Out

Computer2

Changes the input and output for the

Computer2/Monitor Out ports. When

outputting images to an external

monitor, select Monitor Out. When

inputting image signals from a computer,

select Computer2.

USB Display On

Off

Set to On to enable the USB Display

feature for a computer connected to the

USB-B1 port.

HDMI Link Device

Connections

Lists the devices connected to the HDMI

ports.

Setting is only displayed when HDMI

Link is set to On.

HDMI Link Set to On to enable the HDMI Link

features.

Audio Out Device Selects whether to output audio from the

internal speakers or a connected

audio/video system.

Setting Options Description

Power On Link Controls what happens when you turn

on the projector or connected device.

•Bidirectional: automatically turns on

the connected device when you turn on

the projector, and vice versa.

•Device -> PJ: automatically turns on

the projector when you turn on the

connected device.

•PJ -> Device: automatically turns on

the connected device when you turn on

the projector.

Power Off Link Controls whether connected devices are

turned off when you turn off the

projector.

Reset Signal I/O

Settings

— Resets all adjustment values on the

Signal I/O menu to their default settings.

gg Related Links

• "Inverting the Audio Channels" p.87

Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu 209

Settings on the Installation menu help you set up your projector in your

installation environment.

Setting Options Description

Fixed Installation On

Off

Set to On if you installed the projector in

a fixed location.

Test Pattern — Displays a test pattern to assist in

focusing and zooming the image and

correcting image shape (press the [Esc]

button to cancel pattern display).

Setting Plate

Installation Guide

— Displays a guide screen when installing

the projector.

Vertical Installation Yes

Set to Yes if you installed the projector in

a vertical position.

Setting Options Description

Projection Front

Front/Upside

Down

Rear

Rear/Upside Down

Sets the way the projector faces the

screen so the image is oriented correctly.

Auto Screen

Adjustment

— Automatically corrects the image shape

when you have placed corner markers on

the projection surface.

Geometry

Correction

H/V-Keystone Manually corrects horizontal and vertical

sides.

Quick Corner Corrects image shape and alignment

using an on-screen display.

Arc Correction Corrects the corners and sides of an

image projected on a curved surface.

Point Correction Divides the projected image into a grid

and corrects the distortion by moving the

selected point of intersection from side to

side and up and down.

Memory Save customized sets of settings to

memory.

•Save Memory: saves the current shape

of an image you have adjusted.

•Load Memory: loads the settings you

made and saved.

•Rename Memory: changes the name

of the memory settings.

•Erase Memory: deletes a saved

memory.

•Reset Memory: Resets all saved

memories.

Digital Zoom Various levels

available

Adjusts the size of the projected image.

Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu 210

Setting Options Description

Image Shift Various positions

available

Shifts the image position horizontally

and vertically.

This feature is not available if the Digital

Zoom option is set to the widest setting.

Connect ELPCB02 On

Off

Set to On to switch the input source

between HDMI2 and HDMI3 each time

you press the [HDMI2] button on the

optional interface box (ELPCB02).

Touch Unit — See the Pen/Touch menu table for details

on the Touch Unit settings.

Remote Receiver Front/Rear

Front

Rear

Off

Limits reception of remote control

signals by the selected receiver; Off turns

off all receivers.

Projector ID (EB-

1480Fi only)

— See the Multi-Projection menu table for

details on the Projector ID settings.

Screen Type 4:3

16:6

16:9

16:10

21:9

Sets the aspect ratio of the screen to fit

the image into the projection area.

16:6 is available with EB-1485Fi only.

Screen Position Various positions

available

Shifts the image position horizontally

and vertically.

This feature is not available if you set the

Screen Type setting to the same aspect

ratio as the projector resolution.

High Altitude

Mode

Off

Regulates the projector’s operating

temperature at altitudes above 1500 m.

Reset Installation

Settings

— Resets all adjustment values on the

Installation menu to their default

settings, except for the following:

•Digital Zoom

•Image Shift

gg Related Links

• "Projection Modes" p.55

• "Image Shape" p.61

• "Projector Setup and Installation Options" p.28

• "Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu" p.233

• "Projector Pen And Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu" p.227

• "Resizing the Image with the Buttons" p.70

Projector Display Settings - Display Menu 211

Settings on the Display menu let you customize various projector display

features.

Setting Options Description

Pattern Display — Displays the selected pattern type on the

screen to aid in presentation.

Attention

If a pattern is displayed for a

long time, a residual image may

be visible in projected images.

Setting Options Description

Pattern Type Pattern 1 to Pattern

User Pattern

Sets a display pattern type. Patterns 1 to

4 are ruled line or grid patterns supplied

by the projector.

To create a custom display pattern, select

User Pattern in the Management menu,

then return to this menu and select User

Pattern.

No-signal Screen Black

Blue

Logo

Sets the screen color or logo to display

when no signal is received.

Startup Screen On

Off

Set to On to display a logo when the

projector starts up.

Home Screen Auto

Disp.

Off

Set to On to display the Home screen

automatically when there is no input

signal when turning on the projector.

Messages On

Off

Set to On to display messages such as

input source name, color mode name,

aspect ratio, no signal message, or high

temperature warning on your projected

image.

Menu Rotation Right 90 Degree

Left 90 Degree

Off

Rotates the menu display 90°.

Split Screen Setting Display Audio

Output Source

Set to On to display an icon with the

source providing audio output during

split screen projection.

Align If you have split two screen images, select

the position of the images to be aligned

at the Top or Middle of the image area.

Reset Display

Settings

— Resets all adjustment values on the

Display menu to their default settings.

Projector Display Settings - Display Menu 212

aIf you turn on Menu Protection of User's Logo, you cannot change the

following user's logo display settings; you must turn off Menu

Protection of User's Logo first.

•No-signal Screen

•Startup Screen

gg Related Links

• "Projecting Multiple Images Simultaneously" p.122

Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu 213

Settings on the Operation menu let you customize various projector features.

Setting Options Description

Auto Source Search On

Off

Set to On to detect the input signal

automatically and project images when

there is no input signal.

This function is disabled when you turn

on the projector in the Quick Startup

mode.

Light Source

Brightness Control

Maintain

Brightness

Set to On to maintain a constant

brightness for the light source.

Maintain

Brightness Level

Select the brightness level you want to

maintain constantly.

Setting is only displayed when Maintain

Brightness is set to On.

Setting Options Description

Estimated Remains Displays how long the projector can

maintain constant brightness.

Setting is only displayed when Maintain

Brightness is set to On.

Light Source Mode Select the brightness for the light source.

•Normal: maximum brightness.

•Quiet: 70% brightness with reduced

fan noise.

•Extended: 70% brightness and extends

the life expectancy of the light source.

•Custom: select a custom brightness

level.

Setting is only displayed when Maintain

Brightness is set to Off.

Brightness Level Select the Custom brightness level you

want.

Setting is only displayed when Maintain

Brightness is set to Off.

Direct Power On On

Off

Set to On to turn on the projector by

plugging it in without pressing the power

button.

Auto Power On HDMI1

Computer1

USB Display

Off

Sets the image source from which you

want to automatically start projection.

When the projector detects the input

signal from the selected image source, it

projects automatically in standby mode.

Sleep Mode On

Off

Set to On to automatically turns off the

projector after an interval of inactivity.

Sleep Mode Timer 1 to 30 minutes Sets the interval for Sleep Mode.

A/V Mute Timer On

Off

Turns off the projector automatically if

A/V Mute is enabled and 30 minutes of

inactivity has passed.

Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu 214

Setting Options Description

Standby Mode Communication

Communication

Off

Set to On to allow monitoring and

controlling the projector over a network

when the projector is in standby mode.

Setting is only displayed when A/V

Output is set to While Projecting.

Port Wired LAN

Wireless LAN

Sets the port to use while the Standby

Mode setting is set to Communication

On.

Quick Startup Off

20min.

60min.

90min.

Sets the time period for Quick Startup

mode. The projector enters this mode

when you turn it off. You can start

projecting in approximately five seconds

by pressing the power button.

(Set A/V Output to While Projecting

first.)

However, it may take longer to become

ready for use in the following situations:

• When projecting from the projector's

USB port

• When projecting from the projector's

HDMI Out port

• When projecting using the Screen

Mirroring features

• If whiteboard sharing was terminated

in the previous session

• If you want to restore the whiteboard

contents from the previous session

Indicators On

Off

Set to Off to turn off the indicator lights

on the projector.

Inv Direction

Button

Off

Set to On to invert the control panel

arrow button direction to match the

projector installation position.

Reset Operation

Settings

— Resets all adjustment values on the

Operation menu to their default settings.

gg Related Links

• "Adjusting the Brightness" p.83

Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu 215

Settings on the Management menu let you customize various projector

administrative features.

Setting Options Description

User Button Light Source Mode

Info

Deinterlacing

Resolution

Mic Input Level

Pattern Display

Auto Calibration

Display LAN Info.

Installation Guide

Assigns a menu option to the [User]

button on the remote control for one-

touch access.

User's Logo Start Setting

Reset

Creates a screen that the projector

displays to identify itself and enhance

security.

Setting Options Description

User Pattern — Captures a projected screen and saves it

as a pattern for display. Select Pattern

Display on the Display menu to display

the saved pattern.

Control Panel Lock Full Lock

Except for Power

Off

Controls projector button locking to

secure the projector:

•Full Lock: locks all buttons.

•Except for Power: locks all buttons

except the power button.

•Off: no buttons locked.

Color Uniformity Color Uniformity Set to On to adjust the color tone balance

for the whole screen.

Adjustment Level Sets the adjustment level.

Start Adjustments Adjusts the red, green, and blue color

tones individually for the selected area.

Reset Resets all adjustment values on the Color

Uniformity menu to their default

settings.

Color Matching

(EB-1480Fi only)

— See the Multi-Projection menu table for

details on the Color Matching settings.

Refresh Mode Timer Sets a time period during which the

projector displays the refresh image.

Messages Set to On to display a message informing

you that the projector is in refresh mode.

Start Starts the refresh mode process to clear

any projected afterimage and turn off the

projector after a specified period of time.

Press any button to cancel this process.

Light Source

Calibration

Run Now Starts light source calibration to optimize

the color balance of the currently

projected image. You may not be able to

start calibration if the projector's

environmental temperature is out of

range. (Wait 20 minutes after turning on

the projector before starting calibration

for the best results.)

Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu 216

Setting Options Description

Run Periodically Set to On to perform light source

calibration periodically every 100 hours

of usage.

Last Run Displays the date and time of the last

light source calibration.

Date & Time Date & Time

Daylight Saving

Time

Internet Time

Adjusts the projector's system time and

date settings. Select Daylight Saving

Time to set daylight saving time settings

for your region. Select Internet Time to

automatically acquire the time from an

Internet time server.

Schedule Settings — Schedules projector events to occur

automatically at selected dates and times.

Wireless LAN

Power

Off

Set to On to project images via a wireless

LAN. If you do not want to connect via

wireless LAN, turn it off to prevent

unauthorized access by others.

Wireless LAN

Diagnosis

Ping

IP Address

Ping until stopped

Start

Transmits Ping to confirm

communication status.

Log Save

Destination

Internal Memory

USB and Internal

Memory

Sets the location in which to save error

and operation log files.

Batch Setup Range All

Limited

Select All to copy all of the projector

menu settings using the batch setup

feature. Select Limited, if you do not

want to copy the following settings:

•Password Protection settings

•EDID in the Signal I/O menu

•Network menu settings

Language Various languages

available

Select the language for projector menu

and message displays.

Setting Options Description

Information Operation Hours

Light Source Hours

Estimated Remains

Source

Input Signal

Resolution

Refresh Rate

Sync Info

Video Signal

HDBaseT Signal

Level (EB-1485Fi)

Status

Serial Number

Event ID

[Version]

Displays information about the projector

and input sources. The displayed items

vary depending on the current input

source.

Items in [Version]

• Main

• HDBaseT (EB-1485Fi)

• Pixel Shift

• Document Camera

• HDBaseT Tx (EB-1485Fi)

Display Logs Temp Warning

Info

Power On/Off

History

Displays log data saved to the location

specified in the Log Save Destination

setting.

Reset Management

Settings

— Resets all adjustment values on the

Management menu to their default

settings, except for the following:

•Schedule Settings

•Language

aWhen you set Menu Protection of Schedule to On, you cannot change

settings on the Schedule Settings. Set Menu Protection of Schedule to

Off first.

gg Related Links

• "Event ID Code List" p.217

• "Adjusting Color Uniformity" p.140

Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu 217

Event ID Code List

If the Event ID option on the Information screen displays a code number,

check this list of Event ID codes for the solution to the projector problem

associated with the code.

If you cannot resolve the problem, contact your network administrator or

Epson for technical support.

Event ID

code

Cause and solution

0026

0032

0036

0037

A screen mirroring communication error has occurred. Turn the

projector off and then on again, or restart the network software.

0027

0028

0029

0030

0031

0035

Unstable screen mirroring communication. Check the network

communication status, wait a few moments, and try connecting to

the network again.

0023

0024

0025

Connection failed. If you see the PIN entry screen on your

computer, enter the PIN code displayed on the network information

screen or at the bottom right of the projected image. If this does not

solve the problem, restart the projector and the connected devices,

and then check the connection settings.

0043 The video format is not supported. Change the resolution of the

mobile device, and then reconnect. Or change the Adjust Image

Quality setting for the projector, and then reconnect.

0432

0435

The network software did not start. Turn the projector off and then

on again.

0433 Cannot display the transferred images. Restart the network software.

0434

0481

0482

0485

Unstable network communication. Check the network

communication status, wait a few moments, and try connecting to

the network again.

Event ID

code

Cause and solution

0483

04FE

The network software quit unexpectedly. Check the network

communication status, then turn the projector off and then on again.

0484 Communication with computer was disconnected. Restart the

network software.

0479

04FF

A projector system error has occurred. Turn the projector off and

then on again.

0891 Cannot find an access point with the same SSID. Set your computer,

access point, and projector to the same SSID.

0892 The WPA/WPA2/WPA3 authentication type does not match. Make

sure the wireless network security settings are correct.

0893 The WEP/TKIP/AES encryption type does not match. Make sure the

wireless network security settings are correct.

0894 Communication with an unauthorized access point was

disconnected. Contact your network administrator.

0895 Communication with a connected device was disconnected. Check

your device connection status.

0898 Failed to acquire DHCP. Make sure the DHCP server is operating

correctly. If you are not using DHCP, set the DHCP setting to Off in

the projector's Network menu.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Wired LAN >IP Settings >

DHCP

sNetwork >Network Settings >Wireless LAN >IP Settings >

DHCP

0899 Other communication errors.

089A The EAP authentication type does not match the network. Check the

wireless LAN security settings and make sure that the security

certificate is installed correctly.

089B EAP server authentication failed. Check the wireless LAN security

settings and make sure that the security certificate is installed

correctly.

089C EAP client authentication failed. Check the wireless LAN security

settings and make sure that the security certificate is installed

correctly.

Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu 218

Event ID

code

Cause and solution

089D Key exchange failed. Check the wireless LAN security settings and

make sure that the security certificate is installed correctly.

0920 The internal battery that saves the projector's date and time settings

is running low. Contact Epson for help.

0B01 The internal storage could not be detected correctly. Turn off the

projector and disconnect the power cord, then reconnect the power

cord and turn the projector back on. When the projector is turned

on, the security certificate and address book are deleted. If that does

not solve the problem, contact Epson for help.

0BFF An error has occurred in the whiteboard function. Restart the

projector.

Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 219

Settings on the Network menu let you view network information and set up

the projector for controlling over a network.

aWhen you set Menu Protection of Network to On, you cannot change

the network settings. Set Menu Protection of Network to Off first.

Setting Options Description

Wireless LAN Info. Projector Name

[Wireless LAN]

Displays wireless network status and

details.

Setting is only displayed when both built-

in and optional wireless LAN modules

are available or Simple AP is set to Off.

Items in [Wireless LAN]

• Antenna Level

• SSID

• Channel

• DHCP

• IP Address

• Subnet Mask

• Gateway Address

• DNS Server 1

• DNS Server 2

• MAC Address

• Region Code

Wireless LAN Info.

IPv6

[IPv6 Address

(Manual)]

[IPv6 Address

(Auto)]

Displays IPv6 information.

Setting is only displayed when both built-

in and optional wireless LAN modules

are available or Simple AP is set to Off.

Items in [IPv6 Address (Manual)]

• IPv6 Address

• Prefix Length

• Gateway Address

Items in [IPv6 Address (Auto)]

• Temporary Address

• Link-local Address

• Stateless Address

• Stateful Address

Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 220

Setting Options Description

Simple AP Projector Name

[Simple AP]

Displays wireless network status and

details.

Setting is only displayed when Simple

AP is set to On.

Items in [Simple AP]

• Antenna Level

• SSID

• Channel

• IP Address

• MAC Address

• Region Code

Wired LAN Info. Projector Name

DHCP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

MAC Address

Displays wired network status and

details.

Wired LAN Info.

IPv6

[IPv6 Address

(Manual)]

[IPv6 Address

(Auto)]

Items in [IPv6 Address (Manual)]

• IPv6 Address

• Prefix Length

• Gateway Address

Items in [IPv6 Address (Auto)]

• Temporary Address

• Link-local Address

• Stateless Address

• Stateful Address

Network Settings — Configures your projector network

settings. See the network menu table for

details on the Network Settings.

Reset Network

Settings

— Resets all adjustment values on the

Network menu to their default settings.

aOnce you have connected your projector to your network, you can

select projector settings and control projection using a compatible Web

browser. This allows you to access the projector remotely.

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Network Settings Menu" p.220

Network Menu - Network Settings Menu

Settings on the Network Settings menu let you select the basic network

settings.

aIf you are connecting via wireless LAN, make sure the followings to

enable wireless LAN settings:

• Turn on the Wireless LAN Power setting in the projector's

Management menu.

Setting Options Description

Projector Name Up to 16

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use " * + ,

/:;<=>?[\]`|

spaces)

Enter a name to identify the projector

over the network.

Remote Password Up to 8

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use * :

spaces)

Enter a password for accessing the

projector using the Basic Control. (User

name is EPSONREMOTE; default

password is guest.)

Web Control

Password

Up to 8

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use * :

spaces)

Enter a password for accessing the

projector over the Web. (User name is

EPSONWEB; default password is

admin.)

Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 221

Setting Options Description

Priority Control

Interface

Wired LAN

Wireless LAN

Sets the priority gateway.

Simple AP On

Off

Set to On to enable simple access point

mode for direct connection between your

projector and input devices. Make sure

you are also doing the following:

• Using Quick Connection Mode of

Epson iProjection

• Using Screen Mirroring connection

Setting is only displayed when Wireless

LAN Power is set to On.

SSID Automatically

assigned SSID

Displays the SSID of the projector for

selection on your device in simple AP

connections.

Security WPA2-PSK Displays the security type for simple AP

connections.

Passphrase Various

passphrases from 8

to 63 characters

Enter the passphrase of the projector for

entry on your device in simple AP

connections.

Channel Various channels

available

Set the frequency band (channel) using

in simple AP connections.

Wireless LAN — See the Wireless LAN menu table for

details.

Wired LAN — See the Wired LAN menu table for

details.

Mail Notification — See the Mail Notification menu table for

details.

Projector Control — See the Projector Control menu table for

details.

Network Projection — See the Network Projection menu table

for details.

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu" p.221

• "Network Menu - Wired LAN Menu" p.223

• "Network Menu - Mail Notification Menu" p.224

• "Network Menu - Projector Control Menu" p.224

• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.225

Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu

Settings on the Wireless LAN menu let you select the wireless LAN settings.

aIf you did not install an optional wireless LAN module, turn off the

Simple AP setting to enable you to select wireless LAN settings.

When connecting to a wireless network, it is strongly recommended that you

set security. When setting security, follow the instructions from the

administrator of the network system you want to connect to.

WPA is an encryption standard that improves the security for wireless

networks. The projector supports AES encryption methods.

aWPA2/WPA3-EAP and WPA3-EAP do not support WPA3 Suite-B

security.

Setting Options Description

Search Access Point To Search View Search for available wireless network

access points. Depending on the access

point settings, they may not be displayed

in the list.

SSID Up to 32

alphanumeric

characters

Enter the SSID (network name) of the

wireless LAN system the projector is

connecting to.

Security WPA2/WPA3-PSK Connects in WPA2/WPA3 personal

mode. Encryption method is selected

automatically according to the access

point settings. Set a passphrase which is

the same for the access point.

Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 222

Setting Options Description

WPA2/WPA3-EAP Connects in WPA2/WPA3 enterprise

mode. Encryption method is selected

automatically according to the access

point settings.

WPA3-PSK Communication is performed using

WPA3 security. Uses AES method for

encryption. When establishing a

connection from a computer to the

projector, enter the value set in the

passphrase.

WPA3-EAP Connects in WPA3 enterprise mode.

Encryption method is selected

automatically according to the access

point settings.

Open Security is not set.

Passphrase Various

passphrases from 8

to 63 characters

Enter the pre-shared passphrase used on

the network.

When the passphrase is entered and the

[Enter] button is pressed, the value is set

and displayed as an asterisk (*).

We recommend changing the passphrase

periodically for security. If the network

settings are initialized, it returns to the

initial passphrase.

Setting is only displayed when Security is

set to WPA3-PSK or WPA2/WPA3-

PSK.

EAP Type

(For WPA3-EAP

and WPA2/WPA3-

EAP security)

PEAP Authentication protocol widely used in

Windows Server.

PEAP-TLS Authentication protocol used in

Windows Server. Select this when using a

client certificate.

EAP-TLS Authentication protocol widely used to

use a client certificate.

Setting Options Description

EAP-FAST Select this when these authentication

protocols are used.

User name Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

Enter a user name for the network. To

include a domain name, add it before a

backslash and the user name

(domain\username).

When importing a client certificate, the

name the certificate was issued to is

automatically set.

Password Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

Enter a password for authentication.

After you enter the password and select

Set, the password is displayed as an

asterisk (*).

Setting is only displayed when EAP Type

is set to PEAP or EAP-FAST.

Client Certificate — Imports the client certificate.

Setting is only displayed when EAP Type

is set to PEAP-TLS or EAP-TLS.

Verify Server

Certificate

Off

Set to On to verify the server certificate

when a CA certificate has been set.

CA certificate — Imports the CA certificate.

RADIUS Server

Name

Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

Enter the server name to verify.

Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 223

Setting Options Description

IP Settings DHCP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

Set DHCP to On if your network assigns

addresses automatically; set to Off to

manually enter the network's IP

Address,Subnet Mask, and Gateway

Address using 0 to 255 for each address

field.

Do not use these addresses: 0.0.0.0,

127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x or 224.0.0.0 through

255.255.255.255 (where x is a number

from 0 to 255) for IP Address,

255.255.255.255 or 0.0.0.0 through

254.255.255.255 for Subnet Mask, and

0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x or 224.0.0.0 through

255.255.255.255 for Gateway Address.

DNS Server 1

DNS Server 2

Various IP

addresses

Enter the IP address for the DNS server,

using 0 to 255 for each address field. The

DNS server resolves the host name. Do

not use the following IP addresses:

127.x.x.x (where x is a number from 0 to

255). When these settings are not set,

DNS server information is acquired

using DHCP.

IPv6 On

Off

Set to On if you want to connect the

projector to the network using IPv6.

IPv6 is supported to monitor and control

the projector over a network using Epson

Web Control and PJLink.

Auto Configuration On

Off

Set to On to assign addresses

automatically according to the Router

Advertisement.

Use Temporary

Address

Off

Set to On if you want to use a temporary

IPv6 address.

IP Address Display On

Off

Set to On to display the IP address on the

network information screen and Home

screen.

Network Menu - Wired LAN Menu

Settings on the Wired LAN menu let you select the wired LAN settings.

Setting Options Description

IP Settings DHCP

IP Address

Subnet Mask

Gateway Address

Set DHCP to On if your network assigns

addresses automatically; set to Off to

manually enter the network's IP

Address,Subnet Mask, and Gateway

Address using 0 to 255 for each address

field.

Do not use these addresses: 0.0.0.0,

127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x or 224.0.0.0 through

255.255.255.255 (where x is a number

from 0 to 255) for IP Address,

255.255.255.255 or 0.0.0.0 through

254.255.255.255 for Subnet Mask, and

0.0.0.0, 127.x.x.x or 224.0.0.0 through

255.255.255.255 for Gateway Address.

DNS Server 1

DNS Server 2

Various IP

addresses

Enter the IP address for the DNS server,

using 0 to 255 for each address field. The

DNS server resolves the host name. You

cannot use the following IP addresses:

127.x.x.x (where x is a number from 0 to

255). When these settings are not set,

DNS server information is acquired

using DHCP.

IPv6 On

Off

Set to On if you want to connect the

projector to the network using IPv6.

IPv6 is supported to monitor and control

the projector over a network using Epson

Web Control and PJLink.

Auto Configuration On

Off

Set to On to assign addresses

automatically according to the Router

Advertisement.

Use Temporary

Address

Off

Set to On if you want to use a temporary

IPv6 address.

Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 224

Setting Options Description

IP Address Display On

Off

Set to On to display the IP address on the

network information screen and Home

screen.

Network Menu - Mail Notification Menu

Settings on the Mail Notification menu let you receive an email notification if

a problem or warning occurs in the projector.

Setting Options Description

Mail Notification On

Off

Set to On to send an email to the preset

addresses when a problem or warning

occurs with a projector.

SMTP Server Various IP

addresses

Enter the IP address for the projector's

SMTP server using 0 to 255 for each

address field.

Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x,

192.0.2.x or 224.0.0.0 through

255.255.255.255 (where x is a number

from 0 to 255).

Port Number 1 to 65535 (default

is 25)

Enter a number for the SMTP server Port

Number.

Authentication Open

Auth

SSL

TLS

Select the authentication type of the

SMTP server.

User Name Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

Enter a user name for the SMTP server.

Password Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

Enter a password for authentication on

the SMTP server.

Setting Options Description

From Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use " ( ) , : ;

< > [ \] spaces)

Enter the email address of the sender.

Address 1 Setting

Address 2 Setting

Address 3 Setting

Enter the e-mail address, and select the

alerts you want to receive.

Network Menu - Projector Control Menu

Settings on the Projector Control menu let you select settings for controlling

the projector over a network.

Setting Options Description

PJLink On

Off

Set to On to enable the PJLink

notification function.

PJLink Password Up to 32

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use spaces

and any symbols

other than @)

Enter a password for using the PJLink

protocol for projector control.

Notified IP Address Various IP

addresses

Enter the IP address to receive the

projector's operating status when the

PJLink notification function is enabled.

Enter the addresses using 0 to 255 for

each address field.

Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x or

224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255

(where x is a number from 0 to 255).

SNMP On

Off

Set to On to monitor the projector using

SNMP. To monitor the projector, you

need to install the SNMP manager

program on your computer. SNMP

should be managed by a network

administrator.

Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 225

Setting Options Description

Trap IP Address 1

Trap IP Address 2

Various IP

addresses

Enter up to two IP addresses to receive

SNMP notifications, using 0 to 255 for

each address field.

Do not use these addresses: 127.x.x.x or

224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255

(where x is a number from 0 to 255).

Community Name Up to 32

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use spaces

and any symbols

other than @)

Enter the SNMP community name.

AMX Device

Discovery

Off

Set to On when you want to allow the

projector to be detected by AMX Device

Discovery.

Crestron

Connected

Off

Set to On only when monitoring or

controlling the projector over the

network using Crestron Connected.

Enabling Crestron Connected disables

the Epson Message Broadcasting feature

in the Epson Projector Management

software.

Control4 SDDP On

Off

Set to On to allow device information to

be acquired using Control4 Simple

Device Discovery Protocol (SDDP).

Secure HTTP On

Off

To strengthen security, communication

between the projector and computer in

Web control is encrypted. When setting

security with Web control, it is

recommended to set this to On.

Web Server

Certificate

— Imports the Web server certificate for

secure HTTP.

Network Menu - Network Projection Settings

Settings on the Network Projection menu let you select the settings relates to

network projection.

Setting Options Description

Epson iProjection On

Off

Set to On to use Epson iProjection.

SSID Display On

Off

Set to On to display the SSID on the

network information screen and Home

screen.

Display LAN Info. Text & QR Code

Text

Sets the display format for the projector's

network information.

By simply reading the QR code with

Epson iProjection, you can connect the

mobile device to the projector through a

network.

Moderator

Password

Four-digit number Enter a password for accessing the

projector as a moderator using Epson

iProjection. (No password is set by

default.)

Projector Keyword On

Off

Set to On to enable a security password

to prevent access to the projector by

anyone not in the same room as the

projector. You must enter a displayed,

randomized keyword from a computer

using Epson iProjection to access the

projector and share the current screen.

Keyword Interrupt

Display

Off

Set to On to display a projector keyword

on the projected image when accessing

the projector using Epson iProjection.

Available when Projector Keyword is set

to On.

Screen Mirroring On

Off

Set to On to use the Screen Mirroring

feature.

Adjust Image

Quality

Adjusts the screen mirroring

speed/quality.

1: increases image quality.

4: increases processing speed.

Projector Network Settings - Network Menu 226

Setting Options Description

Capture Enabled

Disabled

Set to Enabled to enable screen captures

of Screen Mirroring images from the

whiteboard screen toolbar tools.

If you set to Enabled, the HDCP feature

is disabled and you may not be able to

project content with HDCP feature.

Screen Mirroring

Info.

Off

Set to On to display connection

information when projecting from a

Screen Mirroring source.

Message

Broadcasting

Off

Set to On to receive the message

delivered by Epson Projector

Management. See the Epson Projector

Management Operation Guide for details.

Setting is only displayed when Crestron

Connected is set to Off.

Screen Sharing On

Off

Set to On to enable screen sharing

between network projectors.

Connection Mode Keyword On

Keyword Off

Set to Keyword Off to skip

authentication of keywords for other

projectors so you can quickly connect to

them.

gg Related Links

• "Screen Sharing" p.179

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

Projector Pen And Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu 227

Settings on the Pen/Touch menu let you setup the interactive pen and finger

touch operation.

Setting Options Description

Auto Calibration

Manual Calibration

— Starts calibration for pen operations.

Touch Unit Power Set to On to turn on the Touch Unit

power.

Touch Unit Setup Adjusts angle for laser diffusion so it can

precisely detect finger touch positions.

Touch Unit

Adjustment Guide

When using the projector side-by-side

with another projector, displays a guide

for adjusting the adjacent projector's

settings for use with the touch unit.

Setting is only displayed when HDMI

Out Setting is set to Process Out.

Setting Options Description

Touch Calibration Performs calibration for touch

operations with your finger.

Calibration Range If finger touch operations are recognized

as drag operations, select Wide to widen

the calibration range.

Installation of

Projectors

Infrared Intensity If interactive pen performance is unstable

due to infrared interference, select

Strong.

Sync of Projectors If the projectors are connected using the

optional remote control cable set, select

Wired.

Pen Hovering On

Off

When set to On, the pointer follows the

pen tip as you hover it over the screen

and move it around.

PC Interactivity Pen Tracking Mode Selects the device type of the pen

recognized from your OS. For Windows

or Mac (including the computer's ink

feature), select Pen Mode and for

Ubuntu, select Mouse Mode.

Press and Hold When set to Right Click, a long press by

the pen tip or finger acts as a right-click

operation.

Pen Tip Behavior Assigns either Right Click or Left Click

to the pen tip.

USB-B2 Sets the HDMI port used for the

computer connected to the USB-B2 port

when using interactive features with this

computer.

Auto Adjust Pen

Area

Set to On to automatically adjust the pen

area as the resolution for the connected

computer changes. Set to Off if you do

not want to automatically adjust the pen

area that has been manually adjusted.

Manual Adj. Pen

Area

Adjusts the pen area manually.

Projector Pen And Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu 228

Setting Options Description

Reset Pen/Touch

Settings

— Resets all adjustment values on the

Pen/Touch menu to their default

settings.

Projector Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu 229

Settings on the Interactive menu let you customize various projector's

interactive features.

aWhen you set Menu Protection of Interactive to On, you cannot

change settings on the Interactive menu. Set Menu Protection of

Interactive to Off first.

Setting Options Description

Drawing Function On

Off

Set to On to display the interactive

toolbar.

Display Toolbars Always Show

Hide for Set Time

Sets when to display the interactive

toolbar.

Display Drawing

Area

Off

Set to On to display the drawing area.

Setting Options Description

Confirm Clear

Screen

Off

Set to On to display a confirmation

screen before clearing all the content

drawn on the projected screen.

Pen Button

Function

Drawing Toolbar

Eraser

Clear Screen

Off

Sets the function of the button on the

side of the interactive pen.

Display Clock Date&Time

Date

Time

Off

Sets the date and time display on the

whiteboard mode bottom toolbar. Set the

Date & Time setting in the projector's

Management menu first.

Print — See the Print menu table for details.

Save — See the Save menu table for details.

Mail — See the Mail menu table for details.

Directory — See the Directory menu table for details.

Reset Interactive

Settings

— Resets all adjustment values on the

Interactive menu to their default

settings.

gg Related Links

• "Interactive Menu - Print Menu" p.229

• "Interactive Menu - Save Menu" p.230

• "Interactive Menu - Mail Menu" p.231

• "Interactive Menu - Directory Menu" p.231

Interactive Menu - Print Menu

Settings on the Print menu let you select the print settings.

Projector Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu 230

Setting Options Description

Printer USB Printer

Network Printer

Off

Sets the default printer used when

printing.

Printer Address Various IP

addresses

Enter the IP address for the network

printer. You cannot use the following IP

addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x, or

224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255

(where x is a number from 0 to 255). To

return the IP address to its default value,

enter 0.0.0.0.

Printer Type Auto Detect

PCL6 Compatible

ESC/P-R

Sets the type of connected printer. In

most cases, you should leave this as Auto

Detect.

PCL Type Normal

Mode 1

Mode 2

If printing fails when using a PCL6

printer in the Normal mode, try

changing to Mode 1 or Mode 2. You

may not be able to print correctly if this

setting does not match the printer type

and settings of the connected network

printer.

Test Print — Prints a test page.

Default Paper Size A4

Letter

Sets the default paper size.

Interactive Menu - Save Menu

Settings on the Save menu let you select the save settings.

Setting Options Description

USB Storage On

Off

Set to On to save the file to a USB

memory device.

Setting Options Description

PC via USB Cable On

Off

Set to On to save the file to a device

connected to the projector with a USB

cable.

Network Folder On

Off

Set to On to save the file to the network

folder.

CIFS Server Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use " * + , : ;

<=>?[\]`|and

spaces)

Enter the IP address or FQDN (Fully

Qualified Domain Name) for the CIFS

server. You cannot use the following IP

addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.9.2.x, or

224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255

(where x is a number from 0 to 255). If

you specify an FQDN, you must

configure a DNS server.

Shared Folder Path Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use " * / : <

> ? and |)

Enter the network folder name in "share

name\folder name" or "share name".

User name Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter a user name that will have

read/write privileges on the network

folder. You can enter a domain name by

adding it before the user name and

separating them with a backslash

(domain\username).

Password Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter a password for the user name.

After you enter the password and select

OK, the password is displayed as an

asterisk (*).

Check Connection — Tests the network connection.

Always apply

password

Off

Set to On to always set a password on a

file. When set to On, you can save files

only in whiteboard mode and as a PDF

or EWF2 format.

Projector Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu 231

Interactive Menu - Mail Menu

Settings on the Mail menu let you select the email settings.

Setting Options Description

Mail Function On

Off

Set to On to enable sending of emails

containing captured whiteboard

drawings.

SMTP Server Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use " * + , : ;

<=>?[\]`|and

spaces)

Enter the IP address or FQDN (Fully

Qualified Domain Name) for the SMTP

server. You cannot use the following IP

addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.0.2.x, or

224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255

(where x is a number from 0 to 255). If

you specify an FQDN, you must

configure a DNS server.

Port Number 1 to 65535 The default port varies depending on the

Authentication setting: 25 for Open, 465

for SSL, and 587 for TLS.

Authentication Open

Auth

SSL

TLS

Sets the type of authentication expected

by the SMTP server.

User name Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter a user name for the SMTP server.

Password Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter a password for the SMTP server.

Setting Options Description

From Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use " ( ) , : ;

< > [ \ ] and spaces)

Enter the email address to be displayed

to the sender.

Default e-mail

address

Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use " ( ) , : ;

< > [ \ ] and spaces)

Enter the default email address used to

send emails. You can also specify the

domain name following an at mark to aid

email address input; for example,

"@xxx.co.jp".

Send a test e-mail — Connects to the SMTP server and sends a

test email to the address you set as the

default.

Disallow Address

Input

Off

Set to On to choose e-mail addresses

only from an address book or directory

service.

Interactive Menu - Directory Menu

Settings on the Directory menu let you select the directory service settings.

Setting Options Description

Directory Access

Function

Off

Set to On to search for user names and

email addresses from a directory service.

LDAP Server Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use " * + , : ;

<=>?[\]`|and

spaces)

Enter the IP address or FQDN (Fully

Qualified Domain Name) for the LDAP

server. You cannot use the following IP

addresses: 127.x.x.x, 192.9.2.x, or

224.0.0.0 through 255.255.255.255

(where x is a number from 0 to 255). If

you specify an FQDN, you must

configure a DNS server.

Port Number 1 to 65535 Enter a port number for the LDAP

server. The default port is 389. Specify

"3268" to search the global catalog.

Projector Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu 232

Setting Options Description

Authentication Anonymous

Simple

Digest-MD5

Sets the type of authentication expected

by the LDAP server. If you want to select

Digest-MD5 or Simple as an

authentication method when an IP

address is set for LDAP Server, you must

configure the DNS server to enable

reverse DNS lookup.

User Name Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter a user name for the LDAP server.

Use one of the following methods when

entering the user name with the domain

name:

• "domain name\user name"

• "user name@domain name"

Password Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter a password for the LDAP server.

Check Connection — Tests the network connection.

Search Base DN Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter the DN (Distinguished Name)

where the search for user names and

email addresses should start. Make sure

you specify all OU (Organizational Unit)

and DC (Domain Component) as

necessary in the order of OU then DC;

for example,

"OU=accounts,DC=example,DC=com".

The DN must be at or below the DC level

in the database structure.

User Attributes Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter the attribute for user name; for

example, "cn".

Setting Options Description

Mail Attributes Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter the attribute for mail address; for

example, "mail".

Group Attributes Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter the attribute for a user group

name.

Search target

attributes

Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter the search key for user name, email

address, and user group name. The

default value is "cn". You can specify up

to three keys separated by comma(s). Do

not use three or more commas, commas

right at the start or the end, and

continuous commas. The search is

performed using forward matching.

Additional filter Up to 64

alphanumeric

characters

(do not use : and

spaces)

Enter an additional search filter to

Search target attributes.

Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu 233

Settings on the Multi-Projection menu let you set up multiple projectors to

project a single unified image.

This menu appears for EB-1485Fi only.

Setting Options Description

Projector ID Off

1 through 9

Assigns an ID for the projector when you

use multiple projectors.

HDMI Out Setting Off

Pass Through

Process Out

Set to Pass Through to enable up to 4

projectors connected via HDMI cables to

project a unified image.

Set to Process Out to enable use of

interactive pens or finger touch

operations for up to 2 projectors.

Number of

Projectors

2 to 4 Sets the number of projectors used to

create a unified image area.

Setting is only displayed when HDMI

Out Setting is set to Pass Through.

Setting Options Description

Order 1 to 4 (When

HDMI Out Setting

is set to Pass

Through)

1 or 2 (When

HDMI Out Setting

is set to Process

Out)

Sets the position of this projector in

number order from left to right.

Connect Computer Yes

Set to Yes if you connected a computer

to the projector.

Setting is only displayed when HDMI

Out Setting is set to Process Out.

Geometry

Correction

— See the Installation menu table for

details on the Geometry Correction

settings.

Edge Blending Edge Blending

Top Edge

Bottom Edge

Left Edge

Right Edge

Line Guide

Pattern Guide

Guide Color

Corrects a border between multiple

images to create a seamless screen.

Black Level Color Adjustment

Area Correction

Reset

Adjusts the black color of the

overlapping image area

Scale — See the Image menu table for details on

the Scale settings.

Color Uniformity — See the Management menu table for

details on the Color Uniformity settings.

Light Source Mode — See the Operation menu table for details

on the Light Source Mode settings.

Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu 234

Setting Options Description

Color Matching Adjustment Level

Red

Green

Blue

Brightness

Corrects the difference between the tint

and brightness of each projected image.

RGBCMY — See the Image menu table for details on

the RGBCMY settings.

Reset Multi-

Projection Settings

— Resets all adjustment values on the

Multi-Projection menu to their default

settings.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Identification System for Multiple Projector Control" p.138

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

• "Blending the Image Edges" p.142

• "Adjusting the Black Level" p.145

• "Matching the Image Colors" p.144

Image Quality Memory Settings - Memory Menu 235

Settings on the Memory menu let you manage saving and loading of image

quality settings in the projector's memory.

Setting Options Description

Save Memory Memory 1 to 10 Saves customized sets of settings to

memory.

Load Memory Memory 1 to 10 Loads saved memory settings and applies

them to the current image.

Rename Memory Memory 1 to 10 Changes the name of the memory

settings.

Erase Memory Memory 1 to 10 Deletes a saved memory.

Reset Memory — Resets all saved memories.

Projector Setup Settings - ECO Menu 236

Settings on the ECO menu let you customize projector functions to save

power.

Setting Options Description

Light Source Mode — See the Operation menu table for details

on the Light Source Mode settings.

Sleep Mode — See the Operation menu table for details

on the Sleep Mode settings.

Standby Mode — See the Operation menu table for details

on the Standby Mode settings.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.213

Projector Initial Settings and Reset Options - Initial/All Settings Menu 237

Settings on the Initial/All Settings menu let you reset certain projector

settings to their default values.

Setting Options Description

Reset All — Lets you select menus for resetting the

settings to default values.

Reset All options

When you select Reset All, you see the following screen.

If you do not want to reset values in particular menus, deselect the check box

next to the menu name. When you are ready to reset setting values, select

Execute.

You cannot reset the following settings:

• Digital Zoom

• Image Shift

• Schedule Settings

• Language

Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup) 238

After selecting the projector's menu settings for one projector, you can use the

following methods to copy the settings to other projectors, as long as they are

the same model.

• by using a USB flash drive

• by connecting a computer and projector using a USB cable

• by using Epson Projector Management

You cannot copy any information unique to an individual projector, such as

Light Source Hours or Status.

a• Perform batch setup before adjusting the image settings such as

keystone distortion correction. Since image adjustment values are

also copied to another projector, the adjustments you made before

performing the batch setup are overwritten and the projected screen

you adjusted may change.

• When copying the menu settings from one projector to another,

user's logo is also copied. Do not register the information that you do

not want to share between multiple projectors as a user's logo.

• Make sure Batch Setup Range is set to Limited if you do not want to

copy the following settings:

•Password Protection settings

•EDID in the Signal I/O menu

•Network menu settings

Caution

Epson takes no responsibility for batch setup failures and associated repair costs

due to power outages, communication errors, or other problems that may cause

such failures.

gg Related Links

• "Transferring Settings From a USB Flash Drive" p.238

• "Transferring Settings From a Computer" p.239

Transferring Settings From a USB Flash Drive

You can copy menu settings from one projector to another of the same model

using a USB flash drive.

aThe USB flash drive must use a FAT format and not incorporate any

security function. Delete any files on the drive before using it for batch

setup or the settings may not be saved correctly.

aDisconnect the power cord from the projector, and check that all of the

projector's indicators have turned off.

bConnect an empty USB flash drive directly to the projector's USB-A

port.

cHold down the [Esc] button on the remote control or the control panel

and connect the power cord to the projector.

dWhen all of the projector's indicators turn on, release the [Esc] button.

The indicators start flashing and the batch setup file is written to the

USB flash drive. When writing is finished, the projector turns off.

Caution

Do not disconnect the power cord or the USB flash drive from the projector

while the file is being written. If the power cord or USB flash drive is

disconnected, the projector may not start correctly.

eRemove the USB flash drive.

aThe file name for the batch setup file is PJCONFDATA.bin. If

you need to change the file name, add text after PJCONFDATA

using only alphanumeric characters. If you change the

PJCONFDATA section of the file name, the projector may not be

able to recognize the file correctly.

Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup) 239

fDisconnect the power cord from the projector to which you want to

copy settings, and check that all of the projector's indicators have

turned off.

gConnect the USB flash drive containing the saved batch setup file to the

projector's USB-A port.

hHold down the [Menu] button on the remote control or the control

panel and connect the power cord to the projector.

iWhen all of the projector's indicators turn on, release the [Menu]

button. (The indicators remain on for approximately 75 seconds.)

When all of the indicators start flashing, the settings are being written.

When writing is finished, the projector turns off.

Caution

Do not disconnect the power cord or the USB flash drive from the projector

while the file is being written. If the power cord or USB flash drive is

disconnected, the projector may not start correctly.

jRemove the USB flash drive.

Transferring Settings From a Computer

You can copy menu settings from one projector to another of the same model

by connecting the computer and projector with a USB cable.

aYou can use this batch setup method with the following operating

system versions:

• Windows 7 and later

• OS X 10.11.x and later

aDisconnect the power cord from the projector, and check that all of the

projector's indicators have turned off.

bConnect a USB cable to the computer's USB port and to the projector's

USB-B1 port.

cHold down the [Esc] button on the remote control or the control panel

and connect the power cord to the projector.

dWhen all of the projector's indicators turn on, release the [Esc] button.

The computer recognizes the projector as a removable disk.

eOpen the removable disk icon or folder, and save the batch setup file to

the computer.

aThe file name for the batch setup file is PJCONFDATA.bin. If

you need to change the file name, add text after PJCONFDATA

using only alphanumeric characters. If you change the

PJCONFDATA section of the file name, the projector may not be

able to recognize the file correctly.

fEject the USB device (Windows) or drag the removable disk icon to the

Trash (Mac).

gDisconnect the USB cable.

The projector turns off.

hDisconnect the power cord from the projector to which you want to

copy settings, and check that all of the projector's indicators have

turned off.

iConnect the USB cable to the computer's USB port and to the

projector's USB-B1 port.

jHold down the [Menu] button on the remote control or the control

panel and connect the power cord to the projector.

kWhen all of the projector's indicators turn on, release the [Menu]

button.

Copying Menu Settings Between Projectors (Batch Setup) 240

The computer recognizes the projector as a removable disk.

lCopy the batch setup file (PJCONFDATA.bin) that you saved to your

computer to the top level folder of the removable disk.

aDo not copy any files or folders other than the batch setup file to

the removable disk.

mEject the USB device (Windows) or drag the removable disk icon to the

Trash (Mac).

nDisconnect the USB cable.

When all of the indicators start flashing, the settings are being written.

When writing is finished, the projector turns off.

Caution

Do not disconnect the power cord from the projector while the file is being

written. If the power cord is disconnected, the projector may not start

correctly.

gg Related Links

• "Batch Setup Error Notification" p.240

Batch Setup Error Notification

The projector's indicators notify you if an error occurs during a batch setup

operation. Check the status of the projector's indicators and follow the

instructions described in the table here.

Indicator status Problem and solutions

• Laser: Orange - flashing

fast

• Temp: Orange - flashing

fast

The batch setup file may be corrupt, or the USB flash

drive may not be connected correctly.

Disconnect the USB flash drive, unplug and then plug

in the projector's power cord, and then try again.

Indicator status Problem and solutions

• Power: Blue - flashing

fast

• Status: Blue - flashing

fast

• Laser: Orange - flashing

fast

• Temp: Orange - flashing

fast

Writing the settings may have failed and an error may

have occurred in the projector's firmware.

Stop using the projector, remove the power plug from

the electrical outlet. Contact Epson for help.

Maintaining the Projector

Follow the instructions in these sections to maintain your projector.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Maintenance" p.242

• "Cleaning the Lens" p.243

• "Cleaning the Projector Case" p.244

• "Air Filter and Vent Maintenance" p.245

• "Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip" p.249

Projector Maintenance 242

You may need to clean the projector's lens periodically, and clean the air filter

and air vents to prevent the projector from overheating due to blocked

ventilation.

The only parts you should replace are the air filter, remote control batteries,

interactive pen batteries, and interactive pen tips. If any other part needs

replacing, contact Epson or an authorized Epson servicer.

Warning

Before cleaning any part of the projector, turn it off and unplug the power cord.

Never open any cover on the projector, except as specifically explained in this

manual. Dangerous electrical voltages in the projector can injure you severely.

Cleaning the Lens 243

Clean the projector's lens periodically, or whenever you notice dust or

smudges on the surface.

• To remove dust or smudges, gently wipe the lens with lens-cleaning paper.

• To remove stubborn smudges, moisten a soft, lint-free cloth with lens

cleaner and gently wipe the lens. Do not spray any liquid directly on the

lens.

Warning

Do not use a lens cleaner that contains flammable gas. The high heat generated

by the projector may cause a fire.

Attention

Do not use glass cleaner or any harsh materials to clean the lens and do not

subject the lens to any impacts; otherwise, it could be damaged. Do not use

canned air, or the gases may leave a flammable residue.

Cleaning the Projector Case 244

Before cleaning the projector case, turn off the projector and unplug the

power cord.

• To remove dust or dirt, use a soft, dry, lint-free cloth.

• To remove stubborn dirt, use a soft cloth moistened with water and mild

soap. Do not spray liquid directly on the projector.

Attention

Do not use wax, alcohol, benzene, paint thinner, or other chemicals to clean the

projector case. These can damage the case. Do not use canned air, or the gases

may leave a flammable residue.

Air Filter and Vent Maintenance 245

Regular filter maintenance is important to maintaining your projector. Clean

the air filer when a message appears telling you the temperature inside the

projector has reached a high level. It is recommended that you clean these

parts over a 20000‑hour period. Clean them more often than this if you use

the projector in a particularly dusty environment.

Attention

If regular maintenance is not performed, your Epson projector will notify you

when the temperature inside the projector has reached a high level. Do not wait

until this warning appears to maintain your projector filter as prolonged exposure

to high temperatures may reduce the life of your projector.

gg Related Links

• "Cleaning the Air Filter" p.245

• "Replacing the Air Filter" p.247

Cleaning the Air Filter

You need to clean the projector's air filters in the following situations:

• The filter or vents get dusty.

• You see a message telling you to clean it.

aTurn off the projector and unplug the power cord.

bLoosen the screws and open the air filter cover.

cPull the air filter out of the projector.

Air Filter and Vent Maintenance 246

dTap each side of the air filter 4 to 5 times to shake off any excess dust.

Attention

Do not use excessive force when tapping the air filter, or it may crack and

become unusable.

eVacuum the front of the air filter (the side with the tabs) to remove any

remaining dust.

Attention

• Do not rinse the air filter in water, or use any detergent or solvent to

clean it.

• Do not use canned air. The gases may leave a flammable residue or push

dust and debris into the projector's optics or other sensitive areas.

fPlace the air filter in the projector as shown.

gClose the air filter cover and tighten the screws.

Air Filter and Vent Maintenance 247

Replacing the Air Filter

You need to replace the air filter in the following situations:

• After cleaning the air filter, you see a message telling you to clean or replace

it.

• The air filter is torn or damaged.

You can replace the air filter while the projector is mounted to the ceiling or

placed on a table.

aTurn off the projector and unplug the power cord.

bLoosen the screws and open the air filter cover.

cPull the air filter out of the projector.

aDispose of used air filters according to local regulations.

• Filter frame: Polypropylene

• Filter: Polypropylene

dPlace the new air filter in the projector as shown.

Air Filter and Vent Maintenance 248

eClose the air filter cover and tighten the screws.

Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip 249

Two interactive pens come with two types of pen tips, soft tips and hard tips.

The soft pen tips are installed on the pens by default.

• If the soft tip gets dirty or damaged, it becomes less responsive. Replace it

with a new one supplied with the product.

• If the soft tip is hard to use on a textured surface, replace it with the hard

tip.

• If you are using an ultra-wide display screen with an aspect ratio of 16:6, use

only the hard pen tip (EB-1485Fi only).

aIf the hard tip is worn down or damaged, replace it with a new one.

gg Related Links

• "Replacing the Soft Pen Tip" p.249

• "Replacing the Soft Pen Tip with the Hard Pen Tip" p.250

Replacing the Soft Pen Tip

aTwist off the tip of the interactive pen to remove it.

bPull the soft tip straight out.

Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip 250

cInsert the new tip.

dTwist on the pen tip.

Replacing the Soft Pen Tip with the Hard Pen Tip

aTwist off the tip of the interactive pen to remove it.

bTwist on the hard pen tip.

Solving Problems

Check the solutions in these sections if you have any problems using the projector.

gg Related Links

• "Projection Problems" p.252

• "Projector Indicator Status" p.253

• "Solving Image or Sound Problems" p.255

• "Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems" p.261

• "Solving Interactive Features Problems" p.263

• "Solving Network Problems" p.267

• "Solving HDMI Link Problems" p.270

Projection Problems 252

If the projector is not working properly, turn it off, unplug it, and then plug it

back in and turn it on.

If this does not solve the problem, check the following:

• The indicators on the projector may indicate the problem.

• The solutions in this manual can help you solve many problems.

If none of these solutions help, contact Epson for technical support.

Projector Indicator Status 253

The indicators on the projector indicate the projector status and let you know

when a problem occurs. Check the status and color of the indicators and then

refer to this table for a solution.

a• If the indicators display a pattern not listed in the table below, turn

the projector off, unplug it, and contact Epson for help.

• When the Indicators setting is set to Off in the projector's

Operation menu, all indicators are off under normal projection

conditions.

APower indicator

BStatus indicator

CLaser indicator

DTemp (temperature) indicator

EWireless LAN indicator

Projector status

Indicator and status Problem and solutions

Power: Lit blue

Status: Lit blue

Laser: Off

Temp: Off

Normal operation.

Power: Lit blue

Status: Flashing blue

Laser: Off

Temp: Off

Warming up, shutting down, or cooling down.

When warming up, wait about 30 seconds for an image

to appear.

All buttons are disabled during warm-up, shutting

down, and cooling down.

Power: Lit blue

Status: Off

Laser: Off

Temp: Off

Standby, sleep mode, or monitoring.

When you press the power button, projection starts.

Power: Flashing blue

Status: Off

Laser: Off

Temp: Off

Preparing for monitoring or quick startup mode. All

features are disabled.

Power: Indicator status

varies

Status: Flashing blue

Laser: Flashing orange

Temp: Indicator status

varies

Refresh Mode is in progress.

sManagement >Refresh Mode

Power: Flashing blue

Status: Indicator status

varies

Laser: Indicator status

varies

Temp: Flashing orange

Projector is too hot.

• Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged

with dust or obstructed by nearby objects.

• Clean or replace the air filter.

• Make sure the environmental temperature is not too

hot.

Projector Indicator Status 254

Indicator and status Problem and solutions

Power: Off

Status: Flashing blue

Laser: Off

Temp: Lit orange

Projector has overheated and turned off. Leave it turned

off to cool down for 5 minutes.

• Make sure that the vents and air filter are not clogged

with dust or obstructed by nearby objects.

• Make sure the environmental temperature is not too

hot.

• Clean or replace the air filter.

• If operating the projector at high altitude, set the High

Altitude Mode setting to On in the projector's

Installation menu.

• If the problem persists, unplug the projector and

contact Epson for help.

Power: Flashing blue

Status: Indicator status

varies

Laser: Flashing orange

Temp: Indicator status

varies

Laser warning.

Turn the projector off, unplug it, and contact Epson for

help.

Power: Off

Status: Flashing blue

Laser: Lit orange

Temp: Off

Laser has a problem.

Turn the projector off, unplug it, and contact Epson for

help.

Power: Off

Status: Flashing blue

Laser: Off

Temp: Flashing orange

A fan or sensor has a problem.

Turn the projector off, unplug it, and contact Epson for

help.

Power: Off

Status: Flashing blue

Laser: Flashing orange

Temp: Off

Internal projector error.

Turn the projector off, unplug it, and contact Epson for

help.

Wireless LAN status

Wireless LAN indicator

status

Problem and solutions

Lit blue Wireless LAN is available.

Flashing blue (quickly) Connecting to a device.

Flashing blue (slowly) An error has occurred. Turn off the projector and restart

it.

Off Wireless LAN is not available. Make sure the Wireless

LAN Power setting is set to On in the projector's

Management menu.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

• "Cleaning the Air Filter" p.245

• "Replacing the Air Filter" p.247

Solving Image or Sound Problems 255

Check the solutions in these sections if you have any problems with projected

images or sound.

gg Related Links

• "Solutions When No Image Appears" p.255

• "Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB Display Function" p.255

• "Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears" p.256

• "Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears" p.257

• "Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears" p.257

• "Solutions When the Image is not Rectangular" p.257

• "Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static" p.258

• "Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry" p.258

• "Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are Incorrect" p.259

• "Solutions When an Afterimage Remains on the Projected Image" p.259

• "Solutions to Sound Problems" p.259

• "Solutions to Microphone Problems" p.260

• "Solutions When Image File Names are not Displayed Correctly in PC Free"

p.260

Solutions When No Image Appears

If no image appears, try the following solutions:

• Press the [A/V Mute] button on the remote control to see if the image was

temporarily turned off.

• Make sure all necessary cables are securely connected and the power is on

for the projector and connected video sources.

• Press the projector's power button to wake it from standby or sleep mode.

Also, check if the connected computer is in sleep mode or displaying a

blank screen saver.

• If the projector does not respond when you press the control panel buttons,

the buttons may be locked for security. Unlock the buttons in the Control

Panel Lock setting in the projector's Management menu or use the remote

control to turn on the projector.

• To project an image source connected to the Computer2/Monitor Out port,

set the Monitor Out Port setting to Computer2 in the projector's Signal

I/O menu.

• Adjust the Brightness setting in the projector's Image menu for individual

image colors.

• Adjust the brightness of your projector's light source.

• Make sure the Messages setting is set to On in the projector's Display

menu.

• The projector may not be able to project copyrighted videos that you play

back on a computer. For more details, see the manual supplied with the

computer.

• For images projected with Windows Media Center, reduce the screen size

from full screen mode.

• For images projected from applications using Windows DirectX, turn off

DirectX functions.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.207

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.213

• "Projector Display Settings - Display Menu" p.211

• "Unlocking the Projector's Buttons" p.155

Solutions When Image is Incorrect Using the USB

Display Function

If no image appears or if the image appears incorrectly using the USB Display

function, try the following solutions:

• Press the [USB] button on the remote control.

• Disconnect the USB cable, and reconnect it.

• Make sure the USB Display setting is set to On in the projector's Signal I/O

menu.

• Make sure the Epson USB Display software has been installed correctly.

Solving Image or Sound Problems 256

Depending on your OS or computer settings, the software may not have

been installed automatically. Download the latest software from the

following Web site and install it.

epson.sn/

• For Mac, select the USB Display icon in the Dock folder. If the icon does

not appear on the Dock, double-click USB Display in the Applications

folder.

If you select Exit from the USB Display icon menu on the Dock, USB

Display does not start automatically when you connect the USB cable.

• If the mouse cursor flickers, select Make the movement of the mouse

pointer smooth in the Epson USB Display Settings program on your

computer.

• Turn off the Transfer layered window setting in the Epson USB Display

Settings program on your computer.

• If you change the computer resolution during projection, the performance

and quality of the video may decline.

• For images projected with Windows Media Center, reduce the screen size

from full screen mode.

• For images projected from applications using Windows DirectX, turn off

DirectX functions.

gg Related Links

• "Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio" p.32

Solutions When "No Signal" Message Appears

If the "No Signal" message appears, try the following solutions:

• Press the [Source Search] button and wait a few seconds for an image to

appear.

• Turn on the connected computer or video source, and press play to begin

your presentation, if necessary.

• Check that all cables required for projection are securely connected.

• If you are projecting from a laptop computer, make sure it is set up to

display on an external monitor.

• If necessary, turn off the projector and the connected computer or video

source, and then turn them back on.

• If you are projecting from an HDMI source, replace the HDMI cable with

the shorter one.

gg Related Links

• "Displaying From a Laptop" p.256

• "Displaying From a Mac Laptop" p.256

Displaying From a Laptop

If the message "No Signal" is displayed when projecting from a laptop, you

need to set up the laptop to display on an external monitor.

aHold down the laptop's Fn key and press the key labeled with a monitor

icon or CRT/LCD. Wait a few seconds for an image to appear.

bTo display on the laptop's monitor and the projector, try pressing the

same keys again.

cIf the same image is not displayed by the laptop and projector, check

the Windows Display utility to make sure the external monitor port is

enabled and extended desktop mode is disabled.

dIf necessary, check your video card settings and set the multiple display

option to Clone or Mirror.

Displaying From a Mac Laptop

If the message "No Signal" is displayed when projecting from a Mac laptop,

you need to set up the laptop for mirrored display. (See your laptop manual

for details.)

aOpen the System Preferences utility and select Displays.

bSelect the Display or Color LCD option, if necessary.

Solving Image or Sound Problems 257

cClick the Arrange or Arrangement tab.

dSelect Mirror Displays.

Solutions When "Not Supported" Message Appears

If the message "Not supported" is displayed, try the following solutions:

• Make sure the correct input signal is selected in the projector's Signal I/O

menu.

• Make sure the computer's display resolution does not exceed the projector's

resolution and frequency limits. If necessary, select a different display

resolution for your computer.

gg Related Links

• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.207

• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.276

Solutions When Only a Partial Image Appears

If only a partial computer image appears, try the following solutions:

• If you are projecting from a computer using a VGA computer cable, press

the [Auto] button on the remote control to optimize the image signal.

• Make sure you selected the correct Screen Type setting in the projector's

Installation menu for the screen you are using.

If there are margins between the edge of the image and the projected screen

frame, adjust the position of the image.

• Make sure the Scale setting is turned off in the projector's Image menu (EB-

1485Fi only).

• Try adjusting the image position using the Position setting in the

projector's Image menu.

sImage >Analog Signal Adjustment >Position

If you have adjusted the image size using the Wide and Tele buttons or

corrected keystone distortion, perform Image Shift to adjust the image

position.

sInstallation >Digital Zoom >Image Shift

• Press the [Aspect] button on the remote control to select a different image

aspect ratio.

• Change the Resolution setting in the projector's Image menu according to

the signal for the connected equipment.

• If you zoomed into or out of the image using the [E-Zoom] buttons, press

the [Esc] button until the projector returns to a full display.

• Check your computer display settings to disable dual display and set the

resolution within the projector's limits.

• Check the resolution assigned to your presentation files to see if they are

created for a different resolution.

• Make sure you selected the correct Projection setting in the projector's

Installation menu.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.276

• "Adjusting the Image Position Using Screen Position" p.57

Solutions When the Image is not Rectangular

If the projected image is not evenly rectangular, try the following solutions:

• Place the projector directly in front of the center of the screen, facing it

squarely, if possible.

• Press the keystone buttons on the projector to adjust the image shape.

• Adjust the Quick Corner setting to correct the image shape.

sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Quick Corner

• Adjust the Arc Correction setting to correct the image shape projected on a

curved surface.

Solving Image or Sound Problems 258

sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Arc Correction

• Adjust the Point Correction setting to correct slight distortion which

occurs partially.

sInstallation >Geometry Correction >Point Correction

gg Related Links

• "Correcting the Image Shape with the Keystone Buttons" p.61

• "Correcting the Image Shape with Quick Corner" p.62

• "Correcting Image Shape with Arc Correction" p.64

• "Correcting Image Shape with Point Correction" p.66

Solutions When the Image Contains Noise or Static

If the projected image contains electronic interference (noise) or static, try the

following solutions:

• Check the cables connecting your computer or video source to the

projector. They should be:

• Separated from the power cord to prevent interference

• Securely connected at both ends

• Not connected to an extension cable

• Adjust the Noise Reduction,MPEG Noise Reduction, and Deinterlacing

settings in the projector's Image menu.

• Set the Resolution setting to Auto in the projector's Image menu.

• Select a computer video resolution and refresh rate that are compatible with

the projector.

• If you are projecting from a computer using a VGA computer cable, press

the [Auto] button on the remote control to automatically adjust the

Tracking and Sync. settings. If the images are not adjusted correctly,

manually adjust the Tracking and Sync. settings in the projector's Image

menu.

sImage >Analog Signal Adjustment >Tracking

sImage >Analog Signal Adjustment >Sync.

• If you adjusted the image shape using the projector controls, try decreasing

the Sharpness setting in the projector's Image menu to improve image

quality.

• If you connected an extension power cable, try projecting without it to see if

it caused interference in the signal.

• Make sure you selected the correct Signal Format or EDID setting in the

projector's Signal I/O menu, if available for your image source.

• If you are using the USB Display function, turn off the Transfer layered

window setting in the Epson USB Display Settings program on your

computer.

gg Related Links

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.276

• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.207

Solutions When the Image is Fuzzy or Blurry

If the projected image is fuzzy or blurry, try the following solutions:

• Display a test pattern and use it to adjust the image focus using the focus

lever.

• Position the projector close enough to the screen.

• Position the projector so the keystone adjustment angle is not so wide that it

distorts the image.

• Clean the projector lens.

aTo avoid condensation on the lens after bringing the projector in

from a cold environment, let the projector warm up to room

temperature before using it.

• Adjust the Sharpness setting in the projector's Image menu to improve

image quality.

• If you are projecting from a computer using a VGA computer cable, press

the [Auto] button on the remote control to automatically adjust the tracking

Solving Image or Sound Problems 259

and sync. If any bands or overall blurriness remain, display a uniformly

patterned image on the screen and manually adjust the Tracking and Sync.

settings.

sImage >Analog Signal Adjustment >Tracking

sImage >Analog Signal Adjustment >Sync.

• If you are projecting from a computer, use a lower resolution or select a

resolution that matches the projector's native resolution.

gg Related Links

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.207

• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.276

• "Focusing the Image" p.59

• "Cleaning the Lens" p.243

Solutions When the Image Brightness or Colors are

Incorrect

If the projected image is too dark or light, or the colors are incorrect, try the

following solutions:

• Press the [Color Mode] button on the remote control to try different color

modes for the image and environment.

• Check your video source settings.

• Adjust the available settings in the projector's Image menu for the current

input source, such as Brightness,Contrast,Tint,Color Saturation, and

RGBCMY.

• Make sure you selected the correct Signal Format or EDID setting in the

projector's Signal I/O menu, if available for your image source.

• Make sure all the cables are securely connected to the projector and your

video device. If you connected long cables, try connecting shorter cables.

• Position the projector close enough to the screen.

• When using multiple projectors, make sure the Light Source Calibration

setting in the projector's Management menu is set to the same option on all

the projectors and that the projectors have been calibrated recently. If

certain projectors are not calibrated recently, the white balance and

brightness level may not match the other projectors.

gg Related Links

• "Image Quality Settings - Image Menu" p.205

• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.207

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

• "Adjusting Image Quality (Color Mode)" p.78

Solutions When an Afterimage Remains on the

Projected Image

If you see an afterimage in the projected image, use the Refresh Mode feature

to clear it. Select Refresh Mode >Start in the projector's Management menu.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

Solutions to Sound Problems

If there is no sound or the volume is too low or high, try the following

solutions:

• Adjust the projector's volume settings.

• Press the [A/V Mute] button on the remote control to resume video and

audio if they were temporarily stopped.

• Check your computer or video source to make sure the volume is turned up

and the audio output is set for the correct source.

• Check the audio cable connections between the projector and your video

source.

• Make sure any connected audio cables are labeled "No Resistance".

• If you are using the USB Display function, turn on the Output audio from

the projector setting in the Epson USB Display Settings program on your

computer.

Solving Image or Sound Problems 260

• Select the correct audio input port.

sSignal I/O >Audio Output

sSignal I/O >HDMI Audio Output

• If you want to output audio from a connected audio source when the

projector is in standby mode, select these settings in the projector's menus:

• Turn off Quick Startup in the Operation menu.

• Set the A/V Output setting to Always On in the Signal I/O menu.

• Select the correct audio output in the Audio Out Device setting.

sSignal I/O >HDMI Link >Audio Out Device

• If you do not hear sound from an HDMI source, set the connected device to

PCM output.

• When you are connecting the projector to a Mac using an HDMI cable,

make sure your Mac supports audio through the HDMI port. If not, you

need to connect an audio cable.

• If the volume for the computer is set to the minimum while the projector is

set to the maximum, the noise may be mixed. Turn up the computer's

volume and turn down the projector's volume. (When you use Epson

iProjection (Windows/Mac) or USB Display.)

gg Related Links

• "Projector Connections" p.31

• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.207

• "Controlling the Volume with the Volume Buttons" p.86

Solutions to Microphone Problems

If there is no sound when you use a microphone connected to the projector,

try the following solutions:

• Make sure the microphone is securely connected to the projector.

• Check the Mic Input Level setting in the projector's Signal I/O menu. If the

setting is too high, the sound of other connected devices will be too low.

gg Related Links

• "Input Signal Settings - Signal I/O Menu" p.207

• "Connecting a Microphone" p.41

Solutions When Image File Names are not Displayed

Correctly in PC Free

If any file names are longer than the display area or include unsupported

symbols, the file names are shortened or changed in PC Free. Shorten or

change the file name.

Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems 261

Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems operating the

projector or remote control.

gg Related Links

• "Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems" p.261

• "Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control" p.261

• "Solutions to Password Problems" p.262

• "Solution When "The Battery that Saves Your Clock Settings is Running

Low" Message Appears" p.262

Solutions to Projector Power or Shut-Off Problems

If the projector does not turn on when you press the power button or it turns

off unexpectedly, try the following solutions:

• Make sure the power cord is securely connected to the projector and to a

working electrical outlet.

• If the power button on the remote control does not turn on the projector,

check its batteries and make sure at least one of the remote receivers are

available in the Remote Receiver setting in the projector's Installation

menu.

• The projector's buttons may be locked for security. Unlock the buttons in

the Control Panel Lock setting in the projector's Management menu or use

the remote control to turn on the projector.

• If the projector's light source turns off unexpectedly, it may have entered

sleep mode after a period of inactivity. Perform any operation to wake the

projector. To turn off sleep mode, set the Sleep Mode setting to Off in the

projector's Operation menu.

• If the projector's light source turns off unexpectedly, the A/V mute timer

may be enabled. Set the A/V Mute Timer setting to Off in the projector's

Operation menu.

• If the projector's light source turns off, the status indicator is flashing, and

the temp (temperature) indicator is lit, the projector has overheated and

turned off.

• The cooling fans may run in standby status depending on the projector

settings. Also, when the projector wakes from standby status, the fans may

cause an unexpected noise. This is not a malfunction.

• The power cord may be defective. Disconnect the cord and contact Epson

for help.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.213

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

• "Unlocking the Projector's Buttons" p.155

Solutions to Problems with the Remote Control

If the projector does not respond to remote control commands, try the

following solutions:

• Check that the remote control batteries are installed correctly and have

power. If necessary, replace the batteries.

• Make sure you are operating the remote control within the reception angle

and range of the projector.

• Make sure the projector is not warming up or shutting down.

• Check to see if a button on the remote control is stuck down, causing it to

enter sleep mode. Release the button to wake the remote control up.

• Strong fluorescent lighting, direct sunlight, or infrared device signals may be

interfering with the projector's remote receivers. Dim the lights or move the

projector away from the sun or interfering equipment.

• Make sure at least one of the remote receivers are available in the Remote

Receiver setting in the projector's Installation menu.

• If the Remote Receiver setting is disabled, hold down the [Menu] button on

the remote control for at least 15 seconds to reset the setting to its default.

• If you assigned an ID number to the projector to operate multiple projectors

from the remote control, you may need to check or change the ID setting.

Solving Projector or Remote Control Operation Problems 262

• Press the 0 (zero) button on the remote control while holding down the

[ID] button. By selecting 0 on the remote control, you can operate all of the

projectors regardless of the projector ID settings.

• If you lose the remote control, you can order another one from Epson.

gg Related Links

• "Remote Control Operation" p.47

• "Projector Installation Settings - Installation Menu" p.209

• "Installing Batteries in the Remote Control" p.45

• "Selecting the Projector You want to Operate" p.139

Solutions to Password Problems

If you cannot enter or remember a password, try the following solutions:

• You may have turned on password protection without first setting a

password. Try entering 0000 using the remote control.

• If you have entered an incorrect password too many times and see a

message displaying a request code, write down the code and contact Epson

for help. Provide the request code and proof of ownership for assistance in

unlocking the projector.

• If you set a Epson Web Control password and forgot the user ID or

password, try entering the following:

• User ID: EPSONWEB

• Default password: admin

• If you set a Remote password (in Epson Web Control) and forgot the user

ID or password, try entering the following:

• User ID: EPSONREMOTE

• Default password: guest

• If you lose the remote control you cannot enter a password. Order a new

one from Epson.

Solution When "The Battery that Saves Your Clock

Settings is Running Low" Message Appears

If the message "The battery that saves your clock settings is running low." is

displayed, contact Epson for help.

Solving Interactive Features Problems 263

Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems using the

interactive features.

gg Related Links

• "Solutions When "Error Occurred in the Easy Interactive Function" Message

Appears" p.263

• "Solutions When the Interactive Pens do not Work" p.263

• "Solutions When You Cannot Operate a Computer from the Projected

Screen" p.264

• "Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position is not Accurate" p.264

• "Solutions When the Interactive Pens are Slow or Difficult to Use" p.264

• "Solutions When the Interactive Touch Operation does not Work" p.264

• "Solutions for Problems with Capturing, Printing, Saving, or Scanning"

p.265

• "Solutions When the Time is Incorrect in Whiteboard Settings" p.265

• "Solutions When Whiteboard Mode does not Start" p.266

Solutions When "Error Occurred in the Easy

Interactive Function" Message Appears

If the "Error occurred in the Easy Interactive Function" message appears,

contact Epson for help.

Solutions When the Interactive Pens do not Work

If the interactive pens do not work, try the following solutions:

• Make sure you are not covering the black section near the tip of the pen.

• Try holding the pen at a different angle so that your hand is not blocking

the signal.

• Press the button on the side of the pen to check the remaining battery

power. If the battery indicator does not turn on, replace the battery.

• Make sure the pen tip is securely attached to the pen.

• If the pen tip is worn out or damaged, you may need to replace it.

• Make sure nothing is blocking the signal between the pen and the

interactive pen receiver on the projector.

• Make sure the cable cover is in place to keep cables from blocking the

signal.

• Dim the room lights and turn off any fluorescent lights. Make sure the

projection surface and pen receiver are not in direct sunlight or other

sources of bright lighting.

• Make sure the interactive pen receiver on the projector is clean and free

from dust.

• Make sure there is no interference from infrared remote controls, mice, or

infrared microphones.

• Make sure you perform pen calibration when using the interactive pen for

the first time so that the projector recognizes the position of the pen

correctly. See your projector's Installation Guide for details.

• When using multiple projectors and interactive pens in the same room,

interference may cause pen operations to become unstable. Connect the

optional remote control cable set. If you do not have a remote control cable

set, set the Infrared Intensity setting to Strong in the projector's

Pen/Touch menu.

sPen/Touch >Installation of Projectors >Infrared Intensity

• Try replacing the soft pen tip with the hard pen tip. Doing so may improve

pen operations because some of the projector models do not support the

soft pen tip.

gg Related Links

• "Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip" p.249

• "Using the Interactive Pens" p.91

• "Installing Batteries in the Pens" p.46

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

• "Projector Pen And Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu" p.227

Solving Interactive Features Problems 264

Solutions When You Cannot Operate a Computer

from the Projected Screen

If you cannot operate a computer from the projected screen, try the following

solutions:

• Make sure you perform pen calibration when using the interactive pen for

the first time so that the projector recognizes the position of the pen

correctly. See your projector's Installation Guide for details.

• Make sure the USB cable is securely connected. Disconnect the USB cable,

and then reconnect it.

gg Related Links

• "Replacing the Interactive Pen Tip" p.249

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

• "Connecting to a Computer for USB Video and Audio" p.32

• "Connecting to a Mini PC Installed on a Wall Plate" p.34

Solutions When the Interactive Pen Position is not

Accurate

If the pen position is not the same as the mouse pointer, try the following

solutions:

• Make sure you perform pen calibration when using the interactive pen for

the first time so that the projector recognizes the position of the pen

correctly. If the cursor location and pen position do not match after auto

calibration, you can calibrate manually. See your projector's Installation

Guide for details.

• Make sure the cable cover is in place to keep cables from blocking the

signal.

• Try adjusting the pen operation area.

• If you use the [E-Zoom] + button on the remote control to enlarge the

image, the pen position is not accurate. When you return the image to the

original size, the position should be correct.

• If you created a unified image area using the edge blending feature, set the

Blend Start Position setting of the blended edge to 0.

gg Related Links

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

• "Adjusting the Pen Operation Area" p.113

Solutions When the Interactive Pens are Slow or

Difficult to Use

If the pens are difficult to use or respond too slowly, try the following

solutions:

• For easier operation, hold the pen perpendicular to the projection surface.

• For the best performance, connect your computer to the projector using a

VGA or HDMI cable for display and the USB cable for the interactive

features.

• If you are using USB Display in Windows, you may need to disable

Windows Aero in the Epson USB Display Settings program on your

computer.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Connections" p.31

Solutions When the Interactive Touch Operation does

not Work

If the interactive touch operation using your finger does not work, try the

following solutions:

• If the Turn off Touch feature is activated, touch operations disable

temporarily. Select the Turn on Touch feature on the toolbar.

• Make sure the Finger Touch Unit is installed correctly and the power cable

is properly connected. See your projector's Installation Guide for details.

Solving Interactive Features Problems 265

• If the indicator on the Finger Touch Unit is not on, check that the Power

setting is set to On in the projector's Pen/Touch menu.

sPen/Touch >Touch Unit >Power

• Adjust the angle on the Finger Touch Unit. See your projector's Installation

Guide for details.

• Make sure there are no obstacles (such as cables or pen stand) between the

Finger Touch Unit's laser diffusion port and the projection surface. If there

are any obstacles that are difficult to move, attach the infrared deflectors to

the projection surface. See your projector's Installation Guide for details.

• Make sure there is no interference from infrared remote controls, mice, or

infrared microphones.

• If your finger position and the cursor position on the screen do not match,

perform Touch Calibration in the projector's Pen/Touch menu.

sPen/Touch >Touch Unit >Touch Calibration

• If touch operations do not work correctly even after performing calibration,

check the Calibration Range setting in the projector's Pen/Touch menu.

sPen/Touch >Touch Unit >Calibration Range

• If touch operations are mistakenly recognized as dragging operations,

select Wide.

• If mouse operations are not performed smoothly, select Narrow.

• If there are any people within 10 cm in front of or around the projection

screen or any obstacles causing interference, the touch operations may not

work properly.

• If clothing, or any part of your body comes close to the screen, the touch

operations may not work properly. Move at least 1 cm away from the

screen.

gg Related Links

• "Whiteboard Mode Toolbar" p.97

• "Annotation Mode Toolbar" p.103

• "Using Interactive Touch Operations with Your Finger" p.93

• "Getting the Latest Version of the Documents" p.10

• "Projector Pen And Touch Setup Settings - Pen/Touch Menu" p.227

Solutions for Problems with Capturing, Printing,

Saving, or Scanning

If you are having trouble capturing and pasting, or printing, saving, or

scanning, try the following solutions:

• If you are having trouble pasting a captured image, make sure the image is

not protected.

• If a black frame appears around a pasted image, it may be because the image

was shifted or resized.

• If you are having trouble printing or scanning, make sure the printer is not

out of ink, jammed, or in any other error state.

• For USB printing or scanning, make sure a USB cable is connected between

the projector's USB-A port and the printer's USB type B port.

• For USB printing or scanning, try connecting a different USB cable, and

make sure the cables are less than 4.9 m long.

• Connect only one printer or multifunction device at a time, and make sure

the device is supported by the projector.

• Check the settings in the projector's Interactive menu.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Interactive Settings - Interactive Menu" p.229

• "Connecting a Printer" p.39

Solutions When the Time is Incorrect in Whiteboard

Settings

If the time is incorrect on internal storage settings for whiteboard mode, you

may need to update the Date & Time settings in the projector's Management

menu.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

Solving Interactive Features Problems 266

Solutions When Whiteboard Mode does not Start

If whiteboard mode does not start, try the following solutions:

• Turn on the Drawing Function setting in the projector's Interactive menu.

• When the Easy Interactive Tools software is in use, whiteboard mode does

not start.

gg Related Links

• "Home Screen" p.50

Solving Network Problems 267

Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems using the projector

on a network.

gg Related Links

• "Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails" p.267

• "Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector Through the Web" p.267

• "Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are not Received" p.267

• "Solutions When the Image Contains Static During Network Projection"

p.268

• "Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen Mirroring" p.268

• "Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static During Screen

Mirroring Connection" p.268

• "Solutions When the Projected Screen is not Shared Correctly" p.269

Solutions When Wireless Authentication Fails

If you are having trouble with the authentication, try the following solutions:

• If the wireless settings are correct, but authentication fails, you may need to

update the Date & Time settings in the projector's Management menu.

• Check the Security settings in the projector's Network menu.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Wireless LAN >Security

• If the access point security is WPA3-EAP, change the access point setting to

WPA2/WPA3-EAP.

gg Related Links

• "Projector Administration Settings - Management Menu" p.215

• "Network Menu - Wireless LAN Menu" p.221

Solutions When You Cannot Access the Projector

Through the Web

If you are unable to access the projector through a Web browser, make sure

you are using the correct ID and password.

• For the user ID, enter EPSONWEB. (You cannot change the user ID.)

• For the password, enter the password set in the projector's Network menu.

The default password is admin.

• For the infrastructure mode, make sure you have access to the network the

projector is on.

• If your Web browser is set up to connect via a proxy server, the Epson Web

Control screen cannot be displayed. Make settings for a connection without

using a proxy server.

• If you set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the

projector's Operation menu, make sure the network device is turned on.

After turning on the network device, turn on the projector.

aThe user ID and password are case sensitive.

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Network Settings Menu" p.220

• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.213

Solutions When Network Alert E-Mails are not

Received

If you do not receive an e-mail alerting you to problems with a projector over

the network, try the following solutions:

• Make sure the projector is turned on and connected to the network

correctly. (If an error shuts down the projector, the email may not be

delivered.)

• Make sure you set up the projector e-mail alert settings correctly in the

projector's network Mail Notification menu or in the network software.

• Set the Standby Mode setting to Communication On in the projector's

Operation menu so that the network software can monitor the projector in

standby mode.

And change the Port setting according to your network environment.

Solving Network Problems 268

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Mail Notification Menu" p.224

• "Projector Feature Settings - Operation Menu" p.213

Solutions When the Image Contains Static During

Network Projection

If the projected image contains static during network projection, try the

following solutions:

• Check for any obstacles between the access point, the computer, the mobile

device, and the projector, and change their positions to improve

communication.

• Make sure that the access point, the computer, the mobile device and the

projector are not too far apart. Move them closer together and try to

connect again.

• Check for interference from other equipment, such as a Bluetooth device or

microwave. Move the interfering device farther away or expand your

wireless bandwidth.

• Reduce the number of connected devices if the connection speed declines.

Solutions When You Cannot Connect Using Screen

Mirroring

If you are unable to connect to the projector using Screen Mirroring, try the

following solutions:

• Check the projector's settings.

• Set the Simple AP setting to On.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Simple AP

• Set the Screen Mirroring setting to On.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen

Mirroring

• Select the Screen Mirroring setting to Off and select On again.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen

Mirroring

• Check the mobile device's settings.

• Make sure the settings on the mobile device are correct.

• When connecting again immediately after disconnecting, it may take

some time until the connection is established. Reconnect after waiting for

a while.

• Restart the mobile device.

• Once you have connected using Screen Mirroring, the projector

connection information may be recorded on the mobile device. However,

you may not be able to reconnect to the projector from the recorded

information. Select the projector from the list of available devices.

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Network Settings Menu" p.220

• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.225

Solutions When the Image or Sound Contains Static

During Screen Mirroring Connection

If the projected image or sound contains static when connecting using Screen

Mirroring, try the following solutions:

• Avoid covering the Wi-Fi antenna of the mobile device.

• If you use a Screen Mirroring connection and an internet connection at the

same time, the image may stop or contain noise. Disconnect the internet

connection to expand your wireless bandwidth and improve the connection

speed of the mobile device.

• Make sure the projection contents meet the Screen Mirroring requirements.

• Depending on the settings of the mobile device, the connection may be lost

when the device enters power saving mode. Check the electrical power

saving settings on the mobile device.

• Update to the latest version of the wireless driver or firmware on the mobile

device.

Solving Network Problems 269

Solutions When the Projected Screen is not Shared

Correctly

If the Screen Sharing feature does not deliver the screen to a receiving

projector properly, try the following solutions:

• Connect the projector to the same network as the projector that is sharing

its screen.

• Make sure the receiving projector supports the Screen Sharing function.

• Make sure the Screen Sharing setting is set to On on all projectors.

sNetwork >Network Settings >Network Projection >Screen Sharing

• Close any running Epson iProjection (Windows/Mac) software.

• Make sure the image being projected is not protected by copyright.

• Make sure Sharing is displayed on the status bar that appears in the upper

center part of the screen. If it is not displayed, try reconnecting.

gg Related Links

• "Network Menu - Network Projection Settings" p.225

Solving HDMI Link Problems 270

Check the solutions in these sections if you have problems using the HDMI

Link features.

gg Related Links

• "Solutions When HDMI Link does not Function" p.270

Solutions When HDMI Link does not Function

If you cannot operate the connected devices using the HDMI Link features,

try the following solutions:

• Set the HDMI Out Setting setting to Pass Through in the projector's

Multi-Projection menu.

• Make sure the cable meets the HDMI CEC standard.

• Make sure the connected device meets the HDMI CEC standard. See the

documentation supplied with the device for more information.

• Check that all cables required for HDMI Link are securely connected.

• Make sure the connected devices are turned on and in standby status. See

the documentation supplied with the device for more information.

• If you connected a speaker, set it to PCM output.

• If you connect a new device or change the connection, set the CEC function

for the connected device again and restart the device.

• Do not connect 4 or more multi-media players. You can connect up to 3

multi-media players that meet the HDMI CEC standard at the same time.

• If the device does not appear in the Device Connections list, it does not

meet the HDMI CEC standards. Connect a different device.

gg Related Links

• "Multiple Projector Operation Settings - Multi-Projection Menu" p.233

Appendix

Check these sections for the technical specifications and important notices about your projector.

gg Related Links

• "Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts" p.272

• "Screen Size and Projection Distance" p.274

• "Supported Monitor Display Resolutions" p.276

• "Projector Specifications" p.282

• "External Dimensions" p.284

• "USB Display System Requirements" p.286

• "Easy Interactive Driver System Requirements" p.287

• "List of Safety Symbols and Instructions" p.288

• "Laser Safety Information" p.290

• "Glossary" p.292

• "Notices" p.294

Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts 272

The following optional accessories and replacement parts are available. Please

purchase these products as and when needed.

The following list of optional accessories and replacement parts is current as

of: July 2019.

Details of accessories are subject to change without notice and availability

may vary depending on the country of purchase.

gg Related Links

• "Screens" p.272

• "Cables" p.272

• "Mounts" p.272

• "For Interactive Feature" p.272

• "External Devices" p.272

• "Replacement Parts" p.273

• "For Wireless Connection" p.273

• "Compatible Accessories from Other Projectors" p.273

Screens

50" portable screen ELPSC32/ES1000

A compact screen that can be carried easily. (aspect ratio 4:3)

Cables

Computer cable ELPKC02 (1.8 m - for mini D-sub 15-pin/mini D-Sub

15pin)

Computer cable ELPKC09 (3 m - for mini D-sub 15-pin/mini D-Sub

15pin)

Computer cable ELPKC10 (20 m - for mini D-sub 15-pin/mini D-Sub

15pin)

Use when connecting to the Computer port.

Remote Control Cable Set ELPKC28

Use when connecting multiple projectors that support the interactive

feature.

USB Extension cable ELPKC31

Use when connecting to a USB cable if the cable is too short.

Mounts

Setting plate ELPMB62

Use when installing the projector on a wall.

Wall Mount for Finger Touch Unit ELPMB63

Use when installing Finger Touch Unit on a wall.

aSpecial expertise is required to suspend the projector from a ceiling.

Contact Epson for help.

For Interactive Feature

Interactive Pen ELPPN05A

Interactive Pen ELPPN05B

Use when operating the computer screen on the projection surface.

Replacement Hard Pen Tips ELPPS03

Replacement Soft Pen Tips ELPPS04

Replacement pen tips for the interactive pen.

External Devices

Document Camera ELPDC21

Document Camera ELPDC07

Use when projecting image such as books, OHP documents, or slides.

External Speaker ELPSP02

External self‑powered speaker.

Connection and Control Box ELPCB03

When the projector is mounted on a wall or suspended from a ceiling,

install the remote control to operate the projector at hand.

Optional Accessories and Replacement Parts 273

Control Pad ELPHD02 (EB-1485Fi)

When the projector is mounted on a wall or suspended from a ceiling,

install this to operate the projector remotely. The control pad can send a

signal with an HDBaseT connection. (HDCP2.3 is supported)

Finger Touch Unit ELPFT01

Install this to use your fingers for interactive touch operations.

Replacement Parts

Air filter ELPAF56

Use as a replacement for used air filters.

For Wireless Connection

Wireless LAN module ELPAP11

Use this to project images from a computer via a wireless communication.

(Frequency band: 2.4 GHz/5 GHz)

Compatible Accessories from Other Projectors

The following optional accessories are compatible.

Mounts

Setting plate ELPMB53

Use when installing the projector on a wall.

External Devices

Document Camera ELPDC20

Document Camera ELPDC12

Document Camera ELPDC11

Document Camera ELPDC06

Use when projecting image such as books, OHP documents, or slides.

Connection and Control Box ELPCB02

Connection and Control Box ELPCB01

When the projector is mounted on a wall or suspended from a ceiling,

install the remote control to operate the projector at hand.

Screen Size and Projection Distance 274

Check the table here to determine how far to place the projector from the

screen based on the size of the projected image.

AProjection distance (cm)

BDistance from the projector to the top of the screen (when mounting on a wall

or ceiling, or installing vertically) (cm)

CDistance from the projector to the bottom of the screen (when mounting on a

wall or ceiling, or installing vertically) (cm)

DDistance from the center of the lens to the rear of the projector (without cable

cover) (cm)

16:9 screen size A B C

Minimum (Wide) to

Maximum (Tele)

Minimum

(Wide)

Minimum

(Wide)

65" 143.9 × 80.9 39.2 - 53.6 10.5 91.5

70" 155.0 × 87.2 42.3 - 57.8 11.4 98.5

75" 166.0 × 93.4 45.5 * 12.2 105.6

80" 177.1 × 99.6 48.7 * 13.0 112.6

85" 188.2 × 105.8 51.8 * 13.8 119.6

90" 199.2 × 112.1 55.0 * 14.6 126.7

100" 221.4 × 124.5 61.3 * 16.2 140.7

16:10 screen size A B C

Minimum (Wide) to

Maximum (Tele)

Minimum

(Wide)

Minimum

(Wide)

60" 129.2 × 80.8 39.1 - 53.4 10.5 91.3

65" 140.0 × 87.5 42.5 - 58.1 11.4 98.9

70" 150.8 × 94.2 45.9 * 12.3 106.5

75" 161.5 × 101.0 49.3 * 13.1 114.1

80" 172.3 × 107.7 52.8 * 14.0 121.7

85" 183.1 × 114.4 56.2 * 14.9 129.3

90" 193.9 × 121.2 59.6 * 15.8 136.9

4:3 screen size A B C

Minimum (Wide) to

Maximum (Tele)

Minimum

(Wide)

Minimum

(Wide)

53" 107.7 × 80.8 39.1 - 53.4 10.5 91.3

55" 111.8 × 83.8 40.6 - 55.5 10.9 94.7

60" 121.9 × 91.4 44.5 - 60.8 11.9 103.3

65" 132.1 × 99.1 48.4 * 12.9 112.0

Screen Size and Projection Distance 275

4:3 screen size A B C

Minimum (Wide) to

Maximum (Tele)

Minimum

(Wide)

Minimum

(Wide)

70" 142.2 × 106.7 52.2 * 13.9 120.6

75" 152.4 × 114.3 56.1 * 14.9 129.2

80" 162.6 × 121.9 60.0 * 15.9 137.8

16:6 screen size

(EB-1485Fi only)

A B C

Minimum (Wide) to

Maximum (Tele)

Minimum

(Wide)

Minimum

(Wide)

61" 145.1 × 54.4 39.5 - 54.0 24.2 78.6

65" 154.6 × 58.0 42.2 - 57.7 25.8 83.8

70" 166.5 × 62.4 45.6 - 62.3 27.8 90.2

75" 178.4 × 66.9 49.0 - 66.9 29.8 96.7

80" 190.3 × 71.3 52.4 - 71.5 31.8 103.1

85" 202.2 × 75.8 55.8 - 76.1 33.8 109.6

90" 214.0 × 80.3 59.2 * 35.7 116.0

95" 225.9 × 84.7 62.6 * 37.7 122.5

100" 237.8 × 89.2 66.0 * 39.7 128.9

110" 261.6 × 98.1 72.8 * 43.7 141.8

120" 285.4 × 107.0 79.6 * 47.7 154.7

21:9 screen size A B C

Minimum (Wide) to

Maximum (Tele)

Minimum

(Wide)

Minimum

(Wide)

62" 144.7 × 62.0 39.4 - 53.9 20.3 82.3

65" 151.8 × 65.0 41.4 - 56.6 21.3 86.3

70" 163.4 × 70.0 44.7 - 61.1 22.9 93.0

75" 175.1 × 75.0 48.1 - 65.6 24.5 99.6

21:9 screen size A B C

Minimum (Wide) to

Maximum (Tele)

Minimum

(Wide)

Minimum

(Wide)

80" 186.8 × 80.0 51.4 - 70.1 26.2 106.2

85" 198.4 × 85.0 54.8 - 74.6 27.8 112.9

90" 210.1 × 90.0 58.1 * 29.5 119.5

100" 233.5 × 100.1 64.8 * 32.7 132.8

110" 256.8 × 110.1 71.5 * 36.0 146.1

120" 280.2 × 120.1 78.1 * 39.3 159.3

* Project using Wide (maximum zoom).

Supported Monitor Display Resolutions 276

The table here lists the compatible refresh rate and resolution for each

compatible video display format.

Compatible Mode

Mode

Comput

er HDMI/HDBaseT

RGB YCbCr

4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0

8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12

VGA60 ✓ ✓

VGA72 ✓

VGA75 ✓

VGA85 ✓

SVGA60 ✓ ✓

SVGA72 ✓

SVGA75 ✓

SVGA85 ✓

XGA60 ✓ ✓

XGA70 ✓

XGA75 ✓

XGA85 ✓

WXGA60-1 ✓

WXGA60 ✓ ✓

WXGA75 ✓

WXGA85 ✓

WXGA60-3 ✓ ✓

WXGA+60 ✓ ✓

WXGA+75 ✓

Mode

Comput

er HDMI/HDBaseT

RGB YCbCr

4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0

8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12

WXGA+85 ✓

WXGA++ ✓ ✓

SXGA1_70 ✓

SXGA1_75 ✓

SXGA1_85 ✓

SXGA2_60 ✓ ✓

SXGA2_75 ✓

SXGA2_85 ✓

SXGA3_60 ✓ ✓

SXGA3_75 ✓

SXGA3_85 ✓

SXGA+60 ✓ ✓

SXGA+75 ✓

WSXGA+60 ✓ ✓

UXGA60 ✓ ✓

1920×1080_5

0✓ ✓

1920×1080_6

0✓ ✓

WUXGA60

(Reduced

Blanking)

✓ ✓

QXGA ✓

WQHD ✓

Supported Monitor Display Resolutions 277

Mode

Comput

er HDMI/HDBaseT

RGB YCbCr

4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0

8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12

WQXGA

(Reduced

Blanking)

✓

Mode Information

Mode Resolution

(dot)

H Sync

(KHz)

Refresh

Rate (Hz)

Dotclk

(MHz) Scan Type

VGA60 640 480 31.47 60 25.175 Progressive

VGA72 640 480 37.86 72 31.5 Progressive

VGA75 640 480 37.5 75 31.5 Progressive

VGA85 640 480 43.27 85 36 Progressive

SVGA60 800 600 37.88 60 40 Progressive

SVGA72 800 600 48.08 72 50 Progressive

SVGA75 800 600 46.88 75 49.5 Progressive

SVGA85 800 600 53.67 85 56.25 Progressive

XGA60 1024 768 48.36 60 65 Progressive

XGA70 1024 768 56.48 70 75 Progressive

XGA75 1024 768 60.02 75 78.75 Progressive

XGA85 1024 768 68.68 85 94.5 Progressive

WXGA60-1 1280 768 47.78 60 79.5 Progressive

WXGA60 1280 800 49.7 60 83.5 Progressive

WXGA75 1280 800 62.8 75 106.5 Progressive

WXGA85 1280 800 71.55 85 122.5 Progressive

WXGA60-3 1366 768 47.71 60 85.5 Progressive

Mode Resolution

(dot)

H Sync

(KHz)

Refresh

Rate (Hz)

Dotclk

(MHz) Scan Type

WXGA+60 1440 900 55.94 60 106.5 Progressive

WXGA+75 1440 900 70.64 75 136.75 Progressive

WXGA+85 1440 900 80.43 85 157 Progressive

WXGA++ 1600 900 60 60 108 Progressive

SXGA1_70 1152 864 63.85 70 94.5 Progressive

SXGA1_75 1152 864 67.5 75 108 Progressive

SXGA1_85 1152 864 77.09 85 121.5 Progressive

SXGA2_60 1280 960 60 60 108 Progressive

SXGA2_75 1280 960 75 75 126 Progressive

SXGA2_85 1280 960 85.94 85 148.5 Progressive

SXGA3_60 1280 1024 63.98 60 108 Progressive

SXGA3_75 1280 1024 79.98 75 135 Progressive

SXGA3_85 1280 1024 91.15 85 157.5 Progressive

SXGA+60 1400 1050 65.32 60 121.75 Progressive

SXGA+75 1400 1050 82.28 75 156 Progressive

WSXGA+60 1680 1050 65.29 60 146.25 Progressive

UXGA60 1600 1200 75 60 162 Progressive

1920×1080_50 1920 1080 56.25 50 148.5 Progressive

1920×1080_60 1920 1080 67.5 60 148.5 Progressive

WUXGA60

(Reduced

Blanking)

1920 1200 74.04 60 154 Progressive

QXGA 2048 1536 95.45 60 267.25 Progressive

WQHD 2560 1440 88.79 60 241.5 Progressive

WQXGA

(Reduced

Blanking)

2560 1600 98.71 60 268.5 Progressive

Supported Monitor Display Resolutions 278

Unique Aspect

Compatible Mode

Mode

HDMI/HDBaseT

RGB YCbCr

4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0

8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12

Unique aspect (16:6) ✓

Unique aspect (21:9) ✓

Connecting two

projectors in a chain ✓

Mode Information

Mode Resolution

(dot)

H Sync

(KHz)

Refresh

Rate (Hz)

Dotclk

(MHz) Scan Type

Unique aspect

(16:6) 1920 720 45.96 60 95.045 Progressive

Unique aspect

(21:9) 1920 810 51.72 60 106.956 Progressive

Connecting two

projectors in a

chain

3240 1080 69.00 60 237.084 Progressive

If the image is not projected correctly, set the timing settings on your

computer to match the values in the following tables. (You may not be able to

change these settings, depending on your computer.)

Mode Dotclk

(MHz)

H Freq

(KHz)

V Freq

(Hz)

active

(dot)

Front

Porch

(dot)

H Sync

Width

(dot)

H Back

Porch

(dot)

Unique aspect

(16:6) 95.045 45.96 60 1920 42 32 74

Mode Dotclk

(MHz)

H Freq

(KHz)

V Freq

(Hz)

active

(dot)

Front

Porch

(dot)

H Sync

Width

(dot)

H Back

Porch

(dot)

Unique aspect

(21:9) 106.956 51.72 60 1920 42 32 74

Connecting two

projectors in a

chain

237.084 69.00 60 3240 66 32 98

Mode

active

(Line)

V Front

Porch

(Line)

V Sync

Width

(Line)

V Back

Porch

(Line)

H Sync

Polarity

V Sync

Polarity

Scan

Type

Unique aspect

(16:6) 720 20 8 18 P N Progres

sive

Unique aspect

(21:9) 810 24 8 20 P N Progres

sive

Connected two

projectors in a

chain

1080 37 8 25 P N Progres

sive

P: Positive

N: Negative

Video

Mode Information

Mode Resolution

(dot)

H Sync

(KHz)

Refresh

Rate (Hz)

Dotclk

(MHz) Scan Type

NTSC 720 480 15.73 60 13.500 Interlace

NTSC4.43 720 480 15.73 60 13.500 Interlace

PAL 720 576 15.63 50 13.500 Interlace

M-PAL 720 576 15.73 60 13.500 Interlace

N-PAL 720 576 15.63 50 13.500 Interlace

Supported Monitor Display Resolutions 279

Mode Resolution

(dot)

H Sync

(KHz)

Refresh

Rate (Hz)

Dotclk

(MHz) Scan Type

PAL60 720 576 15.73 60 13.500 Interlace

SECAM 720 576 15.63 50 13.500 Interlace

Compatible Mode

Mode

Comput

er HDMI/HDBaseT

RGB YCbCr

4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0

8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12

SDTV (480i) ✓ ✓ ✓

SDTV (576i) ✓ ✓ ✓

SDTV (480p) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

SDTV (576p) ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓

Mode Information

Mode Resolution

(dot)

H Sync

(KHz)

Refresh

Rate (Hz)

Dotclk

(MHz) Scan Type

SDTV (480i) 720 480 15.73 59.94 13.500 Interlace

SDTV (576i) 720 576 15.63 50 13.500 Interlace

SDTV (480p) 720 480 31.47 59.94 27.000 Progressive

SDTV (576p) 720 576 31.25 50 27.000 Progressive

Compatible Mode

Mode

Comput

er HDMI/HDBaseT

RGB YCbCr

4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0

8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12

HDTV

(720p)_50 ✓✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(720p)_59.94 ✓✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(720p)_60 ✓✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(1080i)_50 ✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(1080i)_59.94 ✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(1080i)_60 ✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(1080p)_23.98 ✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(1080p)_24 ✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(1080p)_29.97 ✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(1080p)_30 ✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(1080p)_50 ✓✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(1080p)_59.94 ✓✓✓✓✓

HDTV

(1080p)_60 ✓✓✓✓✓

Mode Information

Supported Monitor Display Resolutions 280

Mode Resolution

(dot)

H Sync

(KHz)

Refresh

Rate (Hz)

Dotclk

(MHz) Scan Type

HDTV

(720p)_50 1280 720 37.50 50 74.250 Progressive

HDTV

(720p)_59.94 1280 720 44.96 59.94 74.176 Progressive

HDTV

(720p)_60 1280 720 45.00 60 74.250 Progressive

HDTV

(1080i)_50 1920 1080 28.13 50 74.250 Interlace

HDTV

(1080i)_59.94 1920 1080 33.72 59.94 74.176 Interlace

HDTV

(1080i)_60 1920 1080 33.75 60 74.250 Interlace

HDTV

(1080p)_23.98 1920 1080 26.97 23.98 74.176 Progressive

HDTV

(1080p)_24 1920 1080 27.00 24 74.250 Progressive

HDTV

(1080p)_29.97 1920 1080 33.72 29.97 74.176 Progressive

HDTV

(1080p)_30 1920 1080 33.75 30 74.250 Progressive

HDTV

(1080p)_50 1920 1080 56.25 50 148.500 Progressive

HDTV

(1080p)_59.94 1920 1080 67.43 59.94 148.352 Progressive

HDTV

(1080p)_60 1920 1080 67.50 60 148.500 Progressive

Compatible Mode

Mode

HDMI/HDBaseT

RGB YCbCr

4:4:4 4:2:2 4:2:0

8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12 8 10 12

(3840×2160)_23.98 ✓ ✓ ✓

4K (3840×2160)_24 ✓ ✓ ✓

4K (3840×2160)_25 ✓ ✓ ✓

(3840×2160)_29.97 ✓ ✓ ✓

4K (3840×2160)_30 ✓ ✓ ✓

4K (3840×2160)_50 ✓

(3840×2160)_59.94 ✓

4K (3840×2160)_60 ✓

4K(4096×2160)

(SMPTE)_23.98 ✓ ✓ ✓

4K(4096×2160)

(SMPTE)_24 ✓ ✓ ✓

4K(4096×2160)

(SMPTE)_50 ✓

4K(4096×2160)

(SMPTE)_59.94 ✓

4K(4096×2160)

(SMPTE)_60 ✓

Mode Information

Mode Resolution

(dot)

H Sync

(KHz)

Refresh

Rate (Hz)

Dotclk

(MHz) Scan Type

(3840×2160)_23

.98

3840 2160 53.95 23.98 296.703 Progressive

Supported Monitor Display Resolutions 281

Mode Resolution

(dot)

H Sync

(KHz)

Refresh

Rate (Hz)

Dotclk

(MHz) Scan Type

(3840×2160)_24 3840 2160 54.00 24 297.000 Progressive

(3840×2160)_25 3840 2160 56.25 25 297.000 Progressive

(3840×2160)_29

.97

3840 2160 67.43 29.97 296.703 Progressive

(3840×2160)_30 3840 2160 67.50 30 297.000 Progressive

(3840×2160)_50 3840 2160 112.50 50 297.000 Progressive

(3840×2160)_59

.94

3840 2160 134.87 59.94 296.703 Progressive

(3840×2160)_60 3840 2160 135.00 60 297.000 Progressive

4K(4096×2160)

(SMPTE)_23.98 4096 2160 53.95 23.98 296.703 Progressive

4K(4096×2160)

(SMPTE)_24 4096 2160 54.00 24 297.000 Progressive

4K(4096×2160)

(SMPTE)_50 4096 2160 112.50 50 297.000 Progressive

4K(4096×2160)

(SMPTE)_59.94 4096 2160 134.87 59.94 296.703 Progressive

4K(4096×2160)

(SMPTE)_60 4096 2160 135.00 60 297.000 Progressive

aHDBaseT is available only with EB-1485Fi.

Projector Specifications 282

Product name EB‑1485Fi/EB‑1480Fi

Dimensions 458 (W) × 209.5 (H) × 375 (D) mm (not including

raised section)

LCD panel size 0.62"

Display method Poly-silicon TFT active matrix

Resolution 2,073,600 dots *

FWXGA (1,366 (W) × 768 (H) dots) × 3

Focus adjustment Manual

Zoom adjustment 1.0 to 1.35 (Digital Zoom)

Light source Laser diode

Light source output power Up to 104.5 W

Wavelength 449 to 461 nm

Light source life ** Light Source Mode: Normal or Quiet: Up to about

20,000 hours

Light Source Mode: Extended: Up to about 30,000 hours

Max. audio output 8 W × 8 W Stereo

Speaker 2

Power supply 100-240V AC±10% 50/60Hz 3.8 - 1.7 A

Operating power

consumption (100 to 120

V area)

Light Source Mode: Normal, Custom: 381 W

Light Source Mode: Quiet, Extended: 270 W

Operating power

consumption (220 to 240

V area)

Light Source Mode: Normal, Custom: 366 W

Light Source Mode: Quiet, Extended: 262 W

Standby power

consumption

Communication On: 2.0 W

Communication Off: 0.5 W

Operating altitude Altitude 0 to 3,048 m

Operating temperature

(when using a single

projector installation) ***

Altitude of 0 to 2,286 m: +5 to +40°C (No

condensation)

Altitude of 2,287 to 3,048 m: +5 to +35°C (Humidity of

20 to 80%, No condensation)

Operating temperature

(when using a multiple

projector installation) ***

Altitude of 0 to 2,286 m: +5 to +35°C (No

condensation)

Altitude of 2,287 to 3,048 m: +5 to +30°C (Humidity of

20 to 80%, No condensation)

Storage temperature -10 to +60°C (No condensation)

Mass Approx. 9.3 kg

* Pixel shifting technology achieves Full HD resolution on screen.

** Approximate time until the light source brightness decreases to half of its

original value. (Assuming the projector is used in an atmosphere in which

airborne particulate matter is less than 0.04 to 0.2mg/m3. The estimated time

varies depending on the projector usage and operating conditions.)

*** Light source brightness automatically dims if the surrounding temperature

gets too high. (Approximately 35°C at an altitude of 0 to 2,286 m, and

approximately 30°C at an altitude of 2,287 to 3,048 m; however, this may vary

depending on the surrounding environment.)

This product is also designed for IT power distribution system with phase-to-

phase voltage 230V.

Angle of tilt

If you use the projector tilted at an angle of more than 3˚ it could be damaged

and cause an accident.

Projector Specifications 283

gg Related Links

• "Connector Specifications" p.283

Connector Specifications

Computer1 port 1 Mini D-Sub15-pin (female)

Computer2/Monitor Out

port

1 Mini D-Sub15-pin (female)

Video port 1 RCA pin jack

HDMI port 3 HDMI (Audio is only supported by

PCM)

HDBaseT port (EB-1485Fi

only)

1 RJ-45

HDMI Out port 1 HDMI

Audio ports 3 Stereo mini pin jack

Audio Out port 1 Stereo mini pin jack

Mic port 1 Stereo mini pin jack

RS-232C port 1 Mini D-Sub 9-pin (male)

SYNC ports 2 Stereo mini pin jack

TCH port 1 Mini DIN 8-pin

USB-A port 2 USB connector (Type A)

USB-B port 2 USB connector (Type B)

LAN port 1 RJ-45

DC Out port (for power

supply)

1 USB connector (Type A)

a• USB-A and USB-B port supports USB 2.0. However, USB ports are

not guaranteed to operate all devices that support USB.

• USB-B port does not support USB 1.1.

External Dimensions 284

ACenter of the projection lens

BDistance from the top to the ceiling mount fixing points

External Dimensions 285

CDistance from the center of the projection lens to the ceiling mount fixing

points

The unit in these illustrations is mm.

USB Display System Requirements 286

To use the projector's Epson USB Display software, your computer must meet

the following system requirements.

Requirement Windows Mac

Operating system Windows 7

• Ultimate (32- and 64-bit)

• Enterprise (32- and 64-bit)

• Professional (32- and 64-bit)

• Home Premium (32- and 64-

bit)

• Home Basic (32-bit)

• Starter (32-bit)

OS X

• 10.11.x (64-bit)

Windows 8.1

• Windows 8.1 (32- and 64-bit)

• Windows 8.1 Pro (32- and 64-

bit)

• Windows 8.1 Enterprise (32-

and 64-bit)

macOS

• 10.12.x (64-bit)

• 10.13.x (64-bit)

• 10.14.x (64-bit)

Windows 10

• Windows 10 Home (32- and

64-bit)

• Windows 10 Pro (32- and 64-

bit)

• Windows 10 Enterprise (32-

and 64-bit)

CPU Intel Core2Duo or faster

(Intel Core i3 or faster

recommended)

Intel Core2Duo or faster

(Intel Core i5 or faster

recommended)

Memory 2 GB or more

(4 GB or more recommended)

Hard disk space 20 MB or more

Display Resolution between 640 × 480 and 1920 × 1200

16-bit color or greater

Easy Interactive Driver System Requirements 287

To use computer interactive mode on a Mac, you must install the Easy

Interactive Driver on your Mac. Make sure your Mac meets the software

system requirements below.

Requirement Mac

Operating system macOS

• 10.12.x (64-bit)

• 10.13.x (64-bit)

• 10.14.x (64-bit)

CPU Core2 Duo 1.2 GHz or faster

(Core i5 or faster recommended)

Memory 2 GB or more

Recommended: 4 GB or more

Hard disk space 100 MB or more

Display Resolutions no lower than XGA (1024 × 768) and

no higher than WUXGA (1920 × 1200)

16-bit color or greater

List of Safety Symbols and Instructions 288

The following table lists the meaning of the safety symbols labeled on the

equipment.

No. Symbol mark Approved

standards

Description

AIEC60417

No. 5007

"ON" (power)

To indicate connection to the mains.

BIEC60417

No. 5008

"OFF" (power)

To indicate disconnection from the

mains.

CIEC60417

No. 5009

Stand-by

To identify the switch or switch

position by means of which part of the

equipment is switched on in order to

bring it into the stand-by condition.

DISO7000

No. 0434B,

IEC3864-B3.1

Caution

To identify general caution when

using the product.

EIEC60417

No. 5041

Caution, hot surface

To indicate that the marked item can

be hot and should not be touched

without taking care.

FIEC60417

No. 6042

ISO3864-B3.6

Caution, risk of electric shock

To identify equipment that has risk of

electric shock.

GIEC60417

No. 5957

For indoor use only

To identify electrical equipment

designed primarily for indoor use.

HIEC60417

No. 5926

Polarity of d.c. power connector

To identify the positive and negative

connections (the polarity) on a piece

of equipment to which a d.c. power

supply may be connected.

No. Symbol mark Approved

standards

Description

I— The same as No. 8.

JIEC60417

No. 5001B

Battery, general

On battery powered equipment. To

identify a device for instance a cover

for the battery compartment, or the

connector terminals.

KIEC60417

No. 5002

Positioning of cell

To identify the battery holder itself

and to identify the positioning of the

cell(s) inside the battery holder.

L— The same as No. 11.

MIEC60417

No. 5019

Protective earth

To identify any terminal which is

intended for connection to an external

conductor for protection against

electric shock in case of a fault, or the

terminal of a protective earth

electrode.

NIEC60417

No. 5017

Earth

To identify an earth (ground) terminal

in cases where neither the symbol No.

13 is explicitly required.

OIEC60417

No. 5032

Alternating current

To indicate on the rating plate that the

equipment is suitable for alternating

current only; to identify relevant

terminals.

PIEC60417

No. 5031

Direct current

To indicate on the rating plate that the

equipment is suitable for direct

current only; to identify relevant

terminals.

List of Safety Symbols and Instructions 289

No. Symbol mark Approved

standards

Description

QIEC60417

No. 5172

Class II equipment

To identify equipment meeting the

safety requirements specified for Class

II equipment according to IEC 61140.

RISO 3864 General prohibition

To identify actions or operations that

are prohibited.

SISO 3864 Contact prohibition

To indicate injury that could occur

due to touching a specific part of the

equipment.

T— Never look into the optical lens while

the projector is on.

U— To indicate that the marked item don’t

place anything on projector.

VISO3864

IEC60825-1

Caution, laser radiation

To indicate the equipment has a laser

radiation part.

WISO 3864 Disassembly prohibition

To indicate a risk of injury, such as

electric shock, if the equipment is

disassembled.

XIEC60417

No. 5266

Standby, partial standby

To indicate that part of the equipment

is in the ready status.

YISO3864

IEC60417

No. 5057

Caution, movable parts

To indicate that you must keep away

from movable parts according to

protection standards.

ZIEC60417

No. 6056

Caution (Moving Fan Blades)

As a safety precaution, stay away from

the moving fan blades.

No. Symbol mark Approved

standards

Description

aIEC60417

No. 6043

Caution (Sharp Corners)

To indicate sharp corners that should

not be touched.

b— To indicate that looking into the lens

while projecting is prohibited.

cISO7010

No. W027

ISO 3864

Warning, Optical radiation (such as

UV, visible radiation, IR)

Taking care to avoid injury to eyes and

skin when in the vicinity of optical

radiation.

dIEC60417

No. 5109

Not to be used in residential areas.

To identify electrical equipment which

is not suitable for a residential area.

Laser Safety Information 290

This projector is a Class 1 laser product that complies with the IEC/EN60825-

1:2014 international standard for lasers. Follow these safety instructions when

using the projector.

For North/South America: Complies with FDA performance standards for

laser products except for deviations pursant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated

June 24, 2007

Warning

• Do not open the projector's case. The projector contains a high-powered laser.

• Possibly hazardous optical radiation emitted from this product. Do not look at

operating light source. Eye injury may result.

Caution

Do not disassemble the projector when disposing of it. Dispose according to your

local or national laws and regulations.

a• The projector uses a laser as the light source. The laser has the

following characteristics.

• Depending on the surroundings, the brightness of the light source

may decline. The brightness declines a lot when the temperature

gets too high.

• The brightness of the light source declines the longer it is used.

You can change the relationship between usage time and decline in

brightness settings.

gg Related Links

• "Laser Warning Labels" p.290

Laser Warning Labels

Laser warning labels are attached on the projector.

This projector is a Class 1 laser product that complies with the IEC/EN60825-

1:2014 international standard for lasers.

Follow these safety instructions when using the projector.

Inside

Laser Safety Information 291

Top

As with any bright source, do not stare into the beam, RG2 IEC/EN 62471-

5:2015.

Top/Side

For North/South America

This projector is a Class 2 laser product that complies with the IEC/EN60825-

1:2007 international standard for lasers.

Complies with FDA performance standards for laser products except for

deviations pursuant to Laser Notice No. 50, dated June 24, 2007.

Glossary 292

This section briefly explains the difficult terms that are not explained in the

text of this guide. For details, refer to other commercially available

publications.

AMX Device

Discovery

AMX Device Discovery is a technology developed by AMX to

facilitate AMX control systems for easy operation of the target

equipment.

Epson have implemented this protocol technology, and have

provided a setting to enable the protocol function (ON).

See the AMX Web site for more details.

URL http://www.amx.com/

Aspect Ratio The ratio between an image's length and its height.

Screens with a horizontal:vertical ratio of 16:9, such as HDTV

screens, are known as wide screens.

SDTV and general computer displays have an aspect ratio of

4:3.

Composite Video A method that combines the video signal into a luminance

component and a color component for transmission down a

single cable.

Contrast The relative brightness of the light and dark areas of an image

can be increased or decreased to make text and graphics stand

out more clearly, or to make them appear softer. Adjusting this

particular property of an image is called contrast adjustment.

DHCP An abbreviation of Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol, this

protocol automatically assigns an IP address to equipment

connected to a network.

DICOM An acronym for Digital Imaging and Communications in

Medicine.

An international standard that defines image standards and a

communications protocol for medical images.

Gateway Address This is a server (router) for communicating across a network

(subnet) divided according to subnet mask.

HDCP HDCP is an abbreviation for High-bandwidth Digital Content

Protection.

It is used to prevent illegal copying and protect copyrights by

encrypting digital signals sent over DVI and HDMI ports.

Because the HDMI port on this projector supports HDCP, it

can project digital images protected by HDCP technology.

However, the projector may not be able to project images

protected with updated or revised versions of HDCP

encryption.

HDMI™An abbreviation for High Definition Multimedia Interface.

HDMI™is a standard aimed at digital consumer electronics and

computers. This is the standard by which HD images and

multichannel audio signals are digitally transmitted.

By not compressing the digital signal, the image can be

transferred at the highest quality possible. It also provides an

encryption function for the digital signal.

HDTV An abbreviation for High-Definition Television that refers to

high-definition systems which satisfy the following conditions:

• Vertical resolution of 720p or 1080i or greater (p =

Progressive, i = Interlace)

• Screen aspect ratio of 16:9

Interlace Transmits information needed to create one screen by sending

every other line, starting from the top of the image and working

down to the bottom.

Images are more likely to flicker because one frame is displayed

every other line.

IP Address A number to identify a computer connected to a network.

Progressive Projects information to create one screen at a time, displaying

the image for one frame.

Even though the number of scan lines is the same, the amount

of flicker in images decreases because the volume of

information has doubled compared with an interlace system.

Glossary 293

Refresh Rate The light-emitting element of a display maintains the same

luminosity and color for an extremely short time.

Because of this, the image must be scanned many times per

second to refresh the light-emitting element.

The number of refresh operations per second is called the

Refresh rate and is expressed in hertz (Hz).

SDTV An abbreviation for Standard Definition Television that refers

to standard television systems which do not satisfy the

conditions for HDTV High-Definition Television.

SNMP An abbreviation for Simple Network Management Protocol,

which is the protocol for monitoring and controlling devices

such as routers and computers connected to a TCP/IP network.

sRGB An international standard for color intervals that was

formulated so that colors that are reproduced by video

equipment can be handled easily by computer operating

systems (OS) and the Internet. If the connected source has an

sRGB mode, set both the projector and the connected signal

source to sRGB.

SSID SSID is identification data for connecting to another device on

a wireless LAN. Wireless communication is possible between

devices with the same SSID.

Subnet Mask This is a numerical value that defines the number of bits used

for the network address on a divided network (subnet) from the

IP address.

SVGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 800 (horizontal) ×

600 (vertical) dots.

SXGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,280 (horizontal) ×

1,024 (vertical) dots.

Sync. The signals output from computers have a specific frequency.

If the projector frequency does not match this frequency, the

resulting images are not of a good quality.

The process of matching the phases of these signals (the relative

position of the crests and the troughs in the signal) is called

Synchronization.

If the signals are not synchronized, flickering, blurriness, and

horizontal interference occur.

Tracking The signals output from computers have a specific frequency.

If the projector frequency does not match this frequency, the

resulting images are not of a good quality.

The process of matching the frequency of these signals (the

number of crests in the signal) is called Tracking.

If Tracking is not carried out correctly, wide vertical stripes

appear in the signal.

Trap IP Address This is the IP address for the destination computer used for

error notification in SNMP.

VGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 640 (horizontal) ×

480 (vertical) dots.

XGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,024 (horizontal) ×

768 (vertical) dots.

WXGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,280 (horizontal) ×

800 (vertical) dots.

WUXGA A screen size standard with a resolution of 1,920 (horizontal) ×

1,200 (vertical) dots.

Notices 294

Check these sections for important notices about your projector.

gg Related Links

• "FCC Compliance Statement" p.294

• "Indication of the manufacturer and the importer in accordance with

requirements of EU directive" p.295

• "Restriction of Use" p.296

• "Operating System References" p.296

• "Trademarks" p.296

• "Copyright Notice" p.297

• "Copyright Attribution" p.297

FCC Compliance Statement

Supplier's DECLARATION of CONFORMITY

According to 47CFR, Part 2 and 15

Class B Personal Computers and Peripherals; and/or

CPU Boards and Power Supplies used with Class B Personal Computers

We: Epson America, Inc.

Located at: 3840 Kilroy Airport Way Long Beach, CA 90806

Tel: 562-981-3840

Declare under sole responsibility that the product identified herein, complies

with 47CFR Part 2 and 15 of the FCC rules as a Class B digital device. Each

product marketed, is identical to the representative unit tested and found to

be compliant with the standards. Records maintained continue to reflect the

equipment being produced can be expected to be within the variation

accepted, due to quantity production and testing on a statistical basis as

required by 47CFR 2.906. Operation is subject to the following two

conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) this

device must accept any interface received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

Trade Name: EPSON

Type of Product: LCD Projector

Model: H919C / H921C / H923C / H956C / H922C

Options:

Product name Model

Remote controller 2198635 xx (x=0-9)

FCC Compliance Statement For United States Users

This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must accept any interference received,

including interference that may cause undesired operation.

This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the

instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications.

However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular

installation. If this equipment does cause interference to radio and television

reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the

user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the

following measures.

• Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna.

• Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver.

• Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

• Consult the dealer or an experienced radio/TV technician for help.

WARNING

The connection of a non-shielded equipment interface cable to this

equipment will invalidate the FCC Certification or Declaration of this device

and may cause interference levels which exceed the limits established by the

FCC for this equipment. It is the responsibility of the user to obtain and use a

shielded equipment interface cable with this device. If this equipment has

more than one interface connector, do not leave cables connected to unused

Notices 295

interfaces. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the

manufacturer could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.

FCC Statement for the Easy Interactive Pen

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions: (1) this device may not cause harmful